You are on page 1of 580

Service Manual

DMC8000 Paralleling Control System

Equinix - SE-4-2
Order 7384760
DMCDDBABCA0256

English
Original Instructions 7-2019 A063J840 (Issue 1)
Table of Contents
1. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................... 1
1.1 Warning, Caution, and Note Styles Used in This Manual ..................................................... 1
1.2 General Safety Precautions.................................................................................................... 1
1.3 High Ambient Temperatures ................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Moving Parts Can Cause Severe Personal Injury or Death ................................................... 2
1.5 Electrical Shock Can Cause Severe Personal Injury or Death............................................... 2
1.6 Medium (High) Voltage Equipment (Voltages Over 1000 V) .................................................. 3
1.7 Multiple Sources of Electrical Power ...................................................................................... 3
1.8 HMI Bus Status ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.9 Tipping Hazard........................................................................................................................ 3

2. INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Basic Understanding Required for Service............................................................................. 5
2.2 About this Manual ................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 About the DMC ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Product Identification .............................................................................................................. 6
2.5 List of Acronyms ..................................................................................................................... 6
2.6 Related Literature ................................................................................................................... 8

3. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION....................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Power System Components ................................................................................................... 9
3.2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 10
3.3 System Modes ...................................................................................................................... 12
3.3.1 Normal Standby Conditions ....................................................................................... 12
3.3.2 Loss of Utility Source 1 (Auto - Open Transition) ...................................................... 13
3.3.3 Return of Utility Source 1 (Auto - Open Transition) ................................................... 13
3.3.4 Loss of Utility Source 2 (Auto - Open Transition) ...................................................... 14
3.3.5 Return of Utility Source 2 (Auto - Open Transition) ................................................... 14
3.3.6 Loss of Both Utility Sources U1 & U2 (Auto - Open Transition) ................................ 15
3.3.7 Return of Utility Source U1 During Dual Utility Failure (Auto - Open Transition) ...... 15
3.3.8 Return of Utility Source U2 During Dual Utility Failure (Auto - Open Transition) ...... 16
3.3.9 Simultaneous Return of Utility Sources U1 & U2 During Dual Utility Failure
(Auto – Open Transition) ............................................................................................. 16
3.3.10 Test Modes .............................................................................................................. 16
3.4 Normal Load Control............................................................................................................. 18
3.4.1 Load Control Levels ................................................................................................... 18
3.4.2 Load Control Sizing.................................................................................................... 19
3.4.3 Load Control Timing................................................................................................... 19
3.4.4 Load Add Sequence during Loss of Utility Source .................................................... 19
3.4.5 Load Add Sequence during Return to Utility Source ................................................. 20
3.4.6 Load Shed Sequence ................................................................................................ 20
3.4.7 Quick Shed................................................................................................................. 21
3.4.8 Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed............................................................... 21

A063J840 (Issue 1) i Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Table of Contents 7-2019

3.5 Load Demand ....................................................................................................................... 21


3.5.1 Load Demand Sequence ........................................................................................... 21
3.5.2 Load Demand Setpoints ............................................................................................ 22
3.6 Authorized Return to Utility Required ................................................................................... 23
3.7 Generator Set Manual Operation.......................................................................................... 23
3.7.1 Manual Operation from the HMI ................................................................................ 23
3.7.2 Manual Operation from the PCC ............................................................................... 24
3.8 Load Bank / Temporary Generator Set Sequence ............................................................... 24
3.8.1 Load Bank Test On .................................................................................................... 24
3.8.2 Load Bank Test Off .................................................................................................... 25
3.8.3 Paralleling Temporary Generator Set (TG) Sequence - Loss of Normal Source ...... 25
3.8.4 Paralleling Temporary Generator Set (TG) Sequence - Return of Normal
Source ......................................................................................................................... 26
3.9 Failure Modes ....................................................................................................................... 26
3.9.1 Generator Set Failures............................................................................................... 26
3.9.2 52-UT(x) Breakers Failures (Auto - Open Transition)................................................ 27
3.9.3 52-GM Breaker Failures (Auto - Open Transition)..................................................... 29
3.9.4 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout Failures............................................................................ 31
3.9.5 52-GM Breaker Lockout Failures ............................................................................... 32

4. HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE ................................................................................................. 33


4.1 User Access Levels .............................................................................................................. 33
4.2 Initial Screen ......................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.1 Header ....................................................................................................................... 34
4.2.2 Utility Navigation Toolbar ........................................................................................... 35
4.2.3 Primary Navigation Toolbar ....................................................................................... 36
4.2.4 Content Area .............................................................................................................. 36
4.3 Basic Operator Inputs ........................................................................................................... 37
4.3.1 Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 37
4.3.2 Text Boxes ................................................................................................................. 38
4.3.3 Checkboxes ............................................................................................................... 39
4.3.4 Radio Buttons............................................................................................................. 39
4.3.5 Drop-down Menus...................................................................................................... 39
4.3.6 Entry Validation .......................................................................................................... 40
4.3.7 Help Screens.............................................................................................................. 40
4.4 Current Alarm Screen ........................................................................................................... 40
4.5 Security ................................................................................................................................. 42
4.5.1 Login .......................................................................................................................... 42
4.5.2 Logout ........................................................................................................................ 43
4.5.3 Change Password...................................................................................................... 43
4.5.4 Automatic User Logout .............................................................................................. 44
4.5.5 Add User .................................................................................................................... 45
4.5.6 Remove User ............................................................................................................. 46
4.6 Setup..................................................................................................................................... 47
4.6.1 Email Addresses ........................................................................................................ 48
4.6.2 SMTP Settings ........................................................................................................... 49

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. ii A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 Table of Contents

4.6.3 Printer Settings........................................................................................................... 50


4.6.4 Setup Screens............................................................................................................ 50
4.6.5 Diagnostic Screens .................................................................................................... 58
4.7 Oneline Screen ..................................................................................................................... 62
4.7.1 Generator Set Status ................................................................................................. 63
4.7.2 Circuit Breaker Status ................................................................................................ 65
4.7.3 Switch Position Status ............................................................................................... 67
4.7.4 Bus Condition............................................................................................................. 68
4.7.5 Automatic Transfer Switch Status.............................................................................. 68
4.7.6 Utility Status ............................................................................................................... 70
4.7.7 Load Bank Status....................................................................................................... 71
4.7.8 Bus Transformer State............................................................................................... 72
4.8 Generator Summary Screen ................................................................................................. 72
4.8.1 Engine and Alternator Data Gauges.......................................................................... 73
4.8.2 Control Panel ............................................................................................................. 75
4.9 AC Metering Screen.............................................................................................................. 76
4.10 Trending Screen ................................................................................................................. 77
4.10.1 Add Parameter ......................................................................................................... 80
4.10.2 Save Trending Chart Data ....................................................................................... 81
4.10.3 Edit Trend Parameter............................................................................................... 82
4.11 System Control Screens ..................................................................................................... 83
4.11.1 System Settings ....................................................................................................... 83
4.11.2 kW Load Settings..................................................................................................... 85
4.11.3 kVAR Load Settings................................................................................................. 88
4.12 Load Control Screen ........................................................................................................... 89
4.13 Load Bank Screen .............................................................................................................. 91
4.14 Load Demand Screen ......................................................................................................... 94
4.15 Event Log Screen ............................................................................................................... 96
4.16 Alarm History Screen .......................................................................................................... 99
4.17 Scheduler Screen ............................................................................................................. 100
4.18 Generator Report Screen.................................................................................................. 103
4.19 Run Report Screen ........................................................................................................... 106

5. SYSTEM COMPONENTS.......................................................................................................... 109


5.1 PLC M580 ........................................................................................................................... 109
5.1.1 DC Power Supply..................................................................................................... 112
5.1.2 Ethernet Communications Module........................................................................... 113
5.2 I/O Island............................................................................................................................. 114
5.2.1 DC Power Supply..................................................................................................... 114
5.2.2 Remote I/O Drop...................................................................................................... 115
5.2.3 Discrete DC Input..................................................................................................... 117
5.2.4 Discrete Relay Output.............................................................................................. 118
5.3 UPS..................................................................................................................................... 120
5.4 UPS Power Supply ............................................................................................................. 121
5.5 FL Comserver ..................................................................................................................... 122

6. SERVICE PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................... 123

A063J840 (Issue 1) iii Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Table of Contents 7-2019

6.1 Service Tools ...................................................................................................................... 123


6.2 HMI Procedures .................................................................................................................. 123
6.2.1 Disable Enhanced Write Filter ................................................................................. 123
6.2.2 Enable Enhanced Write Filter .................................................................................. 124
6.2.3 Configure IP Address............................................................................................... 126
6.2.4 Print Setup ............................................................................................................... 126
6.2.5 Remote Web Access ............................................................................................... 127
6.2.6 Add Web Clients ...................................................................................................... 133
6.2.7 HMI Program Loading.............................................................................................. 136
6.2.8 Save HMI Program to Laptop .................................................................................. 138
6.3 PLC Procedures.................................................................................................................. 143
6.3.1 PLC to PC File Transfer........................................................................................... 143
6.3.2 PC to PLC File Transfer........................................................................................... 145
6.4 DMC Component Removal and Installation........................................................................ 148
6.4.1 Torque Requirements .............................................................................................. 148
6.4.2 PLC M580 and I/O Island Modules.......................................................................... 148
6.4.3 Circuit Breaker ......................................................................................................... 149
6.4.4 Industrial PC............................................................................................................. 150
6.4.5 UPS and UPS Power Supply................................................................................... 151
6.4.6 Batteries ................................................................................................................... 151

7. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................................... 155


7.1 Alarms................................................................................................................................. 155
7.1.1 Breaker Alarms ........................................................................................................ 155
7.1.2 Generator Set Alarms .............................................................................................. 173
7.1.3 Load Control Alarms ................................................................................................ 180
7.1.4 Communication Alarms ............................................................................................ 182
7.1.5 DMC I/O Alarms....................................................................................................... 187
7.1.6 System Alarms......................................................................................................... 189
7.1.7 Power Transfer Alarms ............................................................................................ 197
7.2 Symptom Based.................................................................................................................. 201
7.2.1 Alarm Horn Sounding Continuously......................................................................... 201
7.2.2 Alarm Horn Does not Sound.................................................................................... 202
7.2.3 Generator Set Not Running When Should Be ......................................................... 203
7.2.4 Touchscreen is Blank............................................................................................... 203

APPENDIX A. OUTLINE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 205

APPENDIX B. INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS ............................................................................... 207

APPENDIX C. SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS ...................................................................................... 209

APPENDIX D. BILLS OF MATERIAL ............................................................................................. 211

APPENDIX E. RECOMMENDED SPARES LIST ........................................................................... 213

APPENDIX F. VENDOR DRAWINGS ............................................................................................ 217

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. iv A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 Table of Contents

APPENDIX G. TESTS AND SETTINGS ......................................................................................... 219

A063J840 (Issue 1) v Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Table of Contents 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. vi A063J840 (Issue 1)


1 Important Safety Instructions
Save these instructions. This manual contains important instructions that should be followed during
installation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment.
Safe and efficient operation can be achieved only if the equipment is properly operated and maintained.
Many accidents are caused by failure to follow fundamental rules and precautions.

1.1 Warning, Caution, and Note Styles Used in This


Manual
The following safety styles and symbols found throughout this manual indicate potentially hazardous
conditions to the operator, service personnel, or equipment.

DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related (e.g., messages relating to
property damage).

1.2 General Safety Precautions


WARNING
Electrical Generating Equipment
Incorrect operation can cause severe personal injury or death.
Do not operate equipment when fatigued, or after consuming any alcohol or drug.

WARNING
Electrical Generating Equipment
Maintaining or installing equipment can cause severe personal injury or death.
Wear personal protective equipment such as safety glasses, protective gloves, hard hats, steel-
toed boots, and protective clothing when working on equipment.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 1 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


1. Important Safety Instructions 7-2019

WARNING
Combustible Liquid
Ignition of combustible liquids is a fire or explosion hazard which can cause severe burns or
death.
Do not store fuel, cleaners, oil, etc., near the equipment.

NOTICE
Keep multi-class ABC fire extinguishers handy. Class A fires involve ordinary combustible
materials such as wood and cloth. Class B fires involve combustible and flammable liquid fuels
and gaseous fuels. Class C fires involve live electrical equipment. (Refer to NFPA No. 10 in
applicable region.)

• Keep the equipment and the surrounding area clean and free from obstructions. Prevent materials
from accumulating under the product. Remove any unused equipment, and keep the floor clean and
dry.
• Make sure all guards, fasteners, supports, doors, and panels are in place and secure.

1.3 High Ambient Temperatures


WARNING
Hot Surfaces
Contact with the hot surfaces can cause severe burns.
Avoid contact with hot parts. Allow hot parts to completely cool.

1.4 Moving Parts Can Cause Severe Personal Injury or


Death
• Keep hands, clothing, and jewelry away from moving parts.
• Make sure that fasteners on the equipment are secure. Tighten supports and clamps. Keep guards
in position.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry in the vicinity of moving parts, or while working on electrical
equipment. Loose clothing and jewelry can become caught in moving parts.

1.5 Electrical Shock Can Cause Severe Personal Injury


or Death
• Remove electric power before removing protective shields or touching electrical equipment. Use
rubber insulated mats placed on dry wood platforms over floors that are metal or concrete when
around electrical equipment. Do not wear damp clothing when handling electrical equipment. Do not
wear jewelry. Jewelry can short out electrical contacts and cause shock or burning.
• Use extreme caution when working on electrical components. High voltages can cause injury or
death. Do not tamper with interlocks.
• Follow all applicable regional electrical and safety codes. Have all electrical installations performed
by a qualified licensed electrician. Tag and lock open switches to avoid accidental closure.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 2 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 1. Important Safety Instructions

1.6 Medium (High) Voltage Equipment (Voltages Over


1000 V)
• Special equipment and training is required to work on or around medium voltage equipment.
Operation and maintenance must be done only by persons trained and experienced to work on such
devices. Improper use or procedures can result in severe personal injury or death.
• Do not work on energized equipment. Unauthorized personnel must not be permitted near energized
equipment. Due to the nature of medium voltage electrical equipment, induced voltage remains even
after the equipment is disconnected from the power source. Plan the time for maintenance with
authorized personnel so that the equipment can be de-energized and safely grounded.

1.7 Multiple Sources of Electrical Power


WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Contact with high voltages can cause severe electrical shock, burns, or death.
The equipment may have more than one source of electrical energy. Disconnecting one source
without disconnecting the others presents a shock hazard. Before starting work, disconnect the
equipment, and verify that all sources of electrical energy have been removed.

1.8 HMI Bus Status


WARNING
Hazardous Voltage
Contact with high voltages can cause severe electrical shock, burns, or death.
Do not use the HMI "Live" or "Dead" status to determine if a bus has or doesn't have electrical
power.

The HMI may not display the correct "Live" or "Dead" status in some failure modes. Follow proper
procedures to verify equipment conditions are met before servicing or supporting this equipment.

1.9 Tipping Hazard


WARNING
Tipping Hazard
Unsecured equipment can tip or fall, which can cause serious injury, or death.
Place and secure cabinets on a level surface.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 3 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


1. Important Safety Instructions 7-2019

FIGURE 1. TIP WARNING

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 4 A063J840 (Issue 1)


2 Introduction
2.1 Basic Understanding Required for Service
WARNING
Many troubleshooting procedures or replacement of parts present hazards that can result in
equipment damage, severe personal injury, or death. Only trained and experienced service
personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service
procedures.

Before servicing the equipment, the service technician should have the following:
• A basic understanding of the power distribution system at the site.
• A basic understanding of the loads at the site.
• Knowledge of the codes and standards that are applicable to the site.
• Any licenses required to perform work at the site.
In addition, read all of the manuals provided with the DMC and other equipment in the power distribution
system such as generator sets, automatic transfer switches, and circuit breakers. Be familiar with the
warnings and operating procedures.

WARNING
Operating the DMC without understanding the functions of the equipment that it is connected to
or reliant on can lead to equipment damage, personal injury, or death. Do not install, operate, or
service the DMC without understanding the functions of the equipment.

The DMC is only one part of the power distribution system. Most power distribution systems consist of the
following equipment:
• Generator sets
• Distribution switchgear, including:
◦ Power transfer equipment, such as transfer switches
◦ Isolation equipment
◦ Metering and protection equipment
• Master paralleling control system; in this case, the DMC
Before installing, operating, or servicing the DMC, make sure that the functions of the equipment that it is
connected to or reliant on are fully understood.

2.2 About this Manual


The purpose of this manual is to provide troubleshooting and repair information. Cummins Inc. cannot
accept any liability whatsoever for problems arising as a result of following recommendations in this
manual.
The DMC should be installed and connected to the rest of the system, without power.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 5 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


2. Introduction 7-2019

Service personnel must be qualified to service electrical and mechanical equipment. A qualified person
needs to have the skills and knowledge related to construction, installation, and operation of electrical
systems and equipment, and must have received safety training on the hazards involved, precautionary
techniques, and protective measures for those tasks. A qualified person is not allowed to work on
electrical systems or equipment until authorized to do so.
The information contained within the manual is based on information available at the time of going to print.
In line with Cummins Inc. policy of continuous development and improvement, information may change at
any time without notice. Therefore, users should make sure that they have the latest information available
before commencing any work. The latest version of this manual is available on QuickServe Online
(https://quickserve.cummins.com).

2.3 About the DMC


The Digital Master Control (DMC) is a microprocessor-based power system and monitoring solution
designed typically to interface with Cummins PowerCommand paralleling generator sets, Automatic
Transfer Switches (ATSs), and switchgear to manage multiple loads.
The control is designed for proper operation without recalibration in ambient temperatures from 0–45 °C
(32–113 °F) and for storage from –20–70 °C (–4–158 °F). The control operates in humidity up to 95%,
non-condensing and at altitudes up to 5000 meters (10,000 feet).

2.4 Product Identification


Each DMC is provided with a nameplate that contains the model number, spec (if applicable), and serial
number. This information is needed for obtaining service. It also contains information unique to each
product.
The nameplate is located on the upper corner of the exterior control panel door.

FIGURE 2. NAMEPLATE EXAMPLE

2.5 List of Acronyms


TABLE 1. LIST OF ACRONYMS

Abbreviation Description
AC Alternating Current
ATS Automatic Transfer Switch
BMS Building Management System
CB Circuit Breaker
CE Conformité Européenne
CT Current Transformer

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 6 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 2. Introduction

Abbreviation Description
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSV Comma-separated Values
DC Direct Current
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DMC Digital Master Control
DNS Domain Name Server
FTP File Transfer Protocol
HMI Human-machine Interface
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP Internet Protocol
LAN Local Area Network
MCM Master Control Module
N.O. Normally Open
NAT Network Address Translation
NEC National Electric Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Agency
OSHPD Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development
OPC Open Platform Communications
PC Personal Computer
PCC PowerCommand® Control
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PT Potential Transformer
PTC Power Transfer Control
RMS Root-mean Square
RSL Recommended Spares List
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TDEN Time Delay Emergency to Normal
TDMP Time Delay Maximum Parallel
TDNE Time Delay Normal to Emergency
TDPT Time Delay Programmed Transition
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus

A063J840 (Issue 1) 7 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


2. Introduction 7-2019

Abbreviation Description
WAN Wide Area Network

2.6 Related Literature


Before any attempt is made to operate the equipment, the operator should take time to read all of the
manuals supplied with the DMC and familiarize themselves with the warnings and operating procedures.
The relevant manuals appropriate to your DMC8000 are listed below:
• Owners Manual (A063J839)
• Service Manual (A063J840)
• Warranty Statement (A049X585)

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 8 A063J840 (Issue 1)


3 Sequence of Operation
3.1 Power System Components
TABLE 2. POWER SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Component Name(s) or Description


Generator Set G1A, G2A, G3A, G4A, G1B, G2B, G3B, G4B
Generator Set Breaker 52-G1A, 52-G2A, 52-G3A, 52-G4A, 52-G1B, 52-G2B, 52-G3B, 52-G4B
Temporary Generator Set TG
Temporary Generator Set / Load Bank 52-TG/LB
Breaker
Utility Main Breaker 52-UTA, 52-UTB
Generator Main Breaker 52-GMA, 52-GMB
Feeder Breaker 52-F1 through 52-F4A and 52-F1B through 52-F4B
Generator Set Bus (Genbus) The bus on which all generator sets start and parallel onto.
Loadbus The bus on which all loads to be serviced reside.
PowerCommand Control PCC3201
The generator set control system that monitors and performs all of the
control and protection functions of the generator set.
First Start System An integrated part of the generator set control that inhibits all but the first
generator set that is ready to load from closing to the Loadbus. A
generator set is considered ready to load when it is at 90% of rated voltage
and frequency. All other generator sets in the system are then required to
synchronize to the Loadbus before closing their generator set breakers.
DMC The control enclosure that houses the PLC and the operator Human-
Machine Interface (HMI).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 9 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.2 Definitions
TABLE 3. DEFINITIONS

Name Description
Control Selection The Control Selection defines the source of system control.
Operator - User manually controls the system sequences from any DMC HMI, including the
Web.
Hardwired Inputs - Allows the system to enter Test with Load or Extended Parallel and use
the customer inputs to the DMC to trigger the relevant mode. Hardwired Inputs is selectable
only when the System Mode is Off.
Scheduler - Allows the scheduled events set up on the Scheduler screen to run. Scheduler
control is selectable only when the System Mode is Off.
System Mode The System Mode indicates the current operating mode of the DMC. Typically, it is set to
Off. When it is set to Off, the DMC is in Standby, ready to respond to a utility source failure.
Selectable system modes are: Test without Load, Test with Load, and Extended Parallel.
Transition Type The Transition Type determines the method of power transfer between the sources.
Auto - Open Transition - The DMC performs break-before-make transition transfers and
retransfers. The loads are not powered for the duration of the Programmed Transition
Delay.
Manual - The DMC disables all automatic control operations and allows operator-initiated
control of the DMC. The operator can request the DMC to open and close breakers, and
start and parallel generator sets. This mode does not allow closed transition transfers.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 10 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

Name Description
Time Delays Time delays ensure the system is safe and stable before performing a transition.
Programmed Transition Delay (Range: 1–60 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - Time
period that both sources remain open during an open transition transfer to allow spinning
loads to decay to a safe level before the transition. It is initiated when no source is
connected and the DMC is in a transfer or retransfer process.
Transfer Delay (Range: 0–12 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - Time period that the
system waits before transferring to the generator set source. It allows time for the utility
source to recover from a momentary power outage and for the generator set source to
stabilize before transferring the load. It is initiated when the minimum generator set capacity
required is online.
Retransfer Delay (Range: 1–120 Minutes, Initial Setting: 1 Minute) - Time period that the
utility source must be available before the system transfers the load from the generator sets
to the utility source. It allows time for the utility source to stabilize before transferring the
load. It is initiated when the Genbus is connected and the utility source becomes available,
in normal or Extended Parallel condition.
Load Add - Genbus Delay (Range: 0–60 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - Time delay
between load add levels when the source is generator sets.
Load Add - Utility Delay (Range: 0–60 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - Time delay
between load add levels when the source is utility.
Load Shed - Shed Delay (Range: 0.1–10 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - Time delay
between load shed levels when the source is generator sets during a bus overload
condition.
Utility Fail Delay (Range: 0–10 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) - The amount of time
that the DMC waits after recognizing a utility failure signal before it initiates a transfer to the
generator sets. It prevents the transfer during a temporary utility failure.
Max Ramp Time (Range: 10–180 Seconds, Initial Setting: 20 Seconds) - Used to predict the
amount of time the system should ramp load up or down. When the time expires, the
system disconnects the paralleled sources.
Min. Capacity to Connect Time Out (Range: 30–600 Seconds, Initial Setting: 2 Seconds) -
Used to initiate an alarm if the minimum capacity has not been reached when the generator
sets are signaled to start.
Load Demand - Initial Delay (Range: 1–60 Minutes, Initial Setting: 1 Minute) - Delay that the
DMC waits after load demand is enabled and all conditions for load demand have been met
before load demand becomes active.
Load Demand - Shutdown Delay (Range: 1–60 Minutes, Initial Setting: 1 Minute) - Delay
that the DMC waits before shutting down a generator set if the facility load is sufficiently low.
The Shutdown Delay is used to place the appropriate number of generator sets in load
demand stop for the load required by the Genbus.
Load Demand - Restart Delay (Range: 0–1500 Seconds, Initial Setting: 0 Seconds) - Delay
required for the Genbus to be at or greater than the restart capacity. The delay helps
prevent a generator set from restarting unnecessarily due to load transients.
Unload kW The DMC uses the Unload kW threshold to determine when to open the utility main or
generator main breaker during soft closed transition transfers.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 11 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

Name Description
Min. Capacity to The minimum amount of spare capacity required to connect the generator sets to the
Connect Loadbus via the generator main breaker.
It is used to make sure enough generation is available to serve the Loadbus when the
generator sets connect.
Required Online A user defined estimate of the total kW consumed when all loads are added to the Loadbus.
Capacity When the capacity of the generator sets connected to the Loadbus is at or exceeds the
Required Online Capacity, it is assumed that enough generation exists to power all loads in
the system. If all of the generator sets are online, the Required Online Capacity is met. This
threshold is used to start timed load adding in the system when more load add levels exist
than the number of generator sets in the system.
Load Dump The PCC generates the Load Dump signal based on the parameters defined by the settings
in each PCC. The default settings are:
Overload - 105% (Range: 80–140%)
Overload Time - 60 Seconds (Range: 0–120 Seconds)
Under Frequency Offset - 3 Hz (Range: 0–10 Hz)
Under Frequency Time - 3 Seconds (Range: 0–20 Seconds)

3.3 System Modes


3.3.1 Normal Standby Conditions
• 13.2 kV Main Switchgear A and B (MSH-A and MSH-B)
◦ Utility Source is available
◦ Utility Transfer Circuit Breaker A (52-UTA): Closed
◦ Utility Transfer Circuit Breaker B (52-UTB): Closed
◦ Main Generator Circuit Breaker A (52-GMA): Open
◦ Main Generator Circuit Breaker B (52-GMB): Open
◦ Feeder Breakers to substations: Closed
• 13.2kV Generator Paralleling Switchgear (TS-A and TS-B)
◦ Generator Circuit Breakers: Open
• 13.2kV Generator Paralleling Tie Switchgear (TS-T)
◦ Generator Tie Circuit Breaker A (52-TA): Closed
◦ Generator Tie Circuit Breaker B (52-TB): Closed
◦ Temporary Generator / Load Bank Breaker (52-TG/LB): Open
◦ All generator sets are in Auto at each generator set PCC.
◦ System Mode is set to Off.
◦ Transition Type is set to Auto - Open Transition.
◦ All Auto/Manual switches are in Auto mode.
◦ TG/LB switch on DMC B is in Load Bank mode.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 12 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.3.2 Loss of Utility Source 1 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The DMC receives a loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility source.
2. The Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.
3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
4. The DMC commands the 52-UTA breaker to open. The 52-UTA breaker opens.
5. After the 52-UTA breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set's start signal is not removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is not required.)
7. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
8. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
9. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
10. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
11. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
12. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires and the Transfer time delay is complete, the DMC
commands the 52-GMA breaker to close. The 52-GMA breaker closes.
13. The Loadbus is powered by the generator set source.
14. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
15. Load Demand operates if it is enabled.

3.3.3 Return of Utility Source 1 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility
source.
2. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC. The Retransfer Delay can be bypassed using the bypass
icon displayed on the Oneline screen.
3. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMA breaker to open. The 52-GMA
breaker opens.
4. After the 52-GMA breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
5. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
6. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTA breaker to close.
The 52-UTA breaker closes.
7. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5 on page 20.
8. The Loadbus is powered by the utility source 1.
9. The DMC removes the start signals from the generator sets.
10. The PCC on each generator set opens its generator set breaker.
11. The generator sets run in cooldown mode and then stop.
12. The system returns to normal standby conditions.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 13 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.3.4 Loss of Utility Source 2 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The DMC receives a loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility source.
2. The Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.
3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
4. The DMC commands the 52-UTB breaker to open. The 52-UTB breaker opens.
5. After the 52-UTB breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set's start signal is not removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is not required.)
7. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
8. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
9. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
10. The Transfer Delay starts and expires in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached.
(Transfer Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
11. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
12. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires and the Transfer time delay is complete, the DMC
commands the 52-GMB breaker to close. The 52-GMB breaker closes.
13. The Loadbus is powered by the generator set source.
14. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
15. Load Demand operates if it is enabled.

3.3.5 Return of Utility Source 2 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility
source.
2. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC. The Retransfer Delay can be bypassed using the bypass
icon displayed on the Oneline screen.
3. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMB breaker to open. The 52-GMB
breaker opens.
4. After the 52-GMB breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
5. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
6. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTB breaker to close.
The 52-UTB breaker closes.
7. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5 on page 20.
8. The Loadbus is powered by the utility source 2.
9. The DMC removes the start signals from the generator sets.
10. The PCC on each generator set opens its generator set breaker.
11. The generator sets run in cooldown mode and then stop.
12. The system returns to normal standby conditions.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 14 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.3.6 Loss of Both Utility Sources U1 & U2 (Auto - Open


Transition)
1. The DMC receives loss of utility source signals from the devices monitoring the utility sources U1
and U2.
2. The Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.
3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
4. The DMC commands the 52-UTA and 52-UTB breakers to open. The 52-UTA and 52-UTB breakers
open.
5. When the 52-UTA and 52-UTB breakers open, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
7. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set's start signal is not removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is not required.)
8. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
9. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
10. The Transfer Delay starts and expires in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached.
(Transfer Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
11. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
12. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires and the Transfer time delay is complete, the DMC
commands the 52-GMA and 52-GMB breakers to close. The 52-GMA and 52-GMB breakers close.
13. The Loadbus is powered by the generator set source.
14. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
15. Load Demand operates if it is enabled.

3.3.7 Return of Utility Source U1 During Dual Utility Failure


(Auto - Open Transition)
1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility
source.
2. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC. The Retransfer Delay can be bypassed using the bypass
icon displayed on the Oneline screen.
3. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMA breaker to open. The 52-GMA
breaker opens.
4. After the 52-GMA breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
5. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
6. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTA breaker to close.
The 52-UTA breaker closes.
7. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5 on page 20.
8. The Loadbus is powered by the utility source 1.
9. The generator sets continue to power the loads on the B side.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 15 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.3.8 Return of Utility Source U2 During Dual Utility Failure


(Auto - Open Transition)
1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility
source.
2. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC. The Retransfer Delay can be bypassed using the bypass
icon displayed on the Oneline screen.
3. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMB breaker to open. The 52-GMB
breaker opens.
4. After the 52-GMB breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
5. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
6. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTB breaker to close.
The 52-UTB breaker closes.
7. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5 on page 20.
8. The Loadbus is powered by the utility source 2.
9. The generator sets continue to power the loads on the A side.

3.3.9 Simultaneous Return of Utility Sources U1 & U2 During


Dual Utility Failure (Auto – Open Transition)
1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signals from the devices monitoring both
utility sources.
2. The Retransfer Delay for both transfer pairs starts in the DMC. The Retransfer Delay can be
bypassed using the bypass icon displayed on the Oneline screen.
3. When the Retransfer Delay for TP1 expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMA breaker to open. The
52-GMA breaker opens.
4. When the Retransfer Delay for TP2 expires, the DMC commands the 52-GMB breaker to open. The
52-GMB breaker opens.
5. After the 52-GMA and 52-GMB breakers open, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
7. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTA and 52-UTB
breakers to close. The 52-UTA and 52-UTB breakers close.
8. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5 on page 20.
9. The Load buses are powered by the respective utility sources.
10. The system returns to normal standby conditions.

3.3.10 Test Modes


Test modes can be executed from different sources.
• From the System Control screen if the Control Selection is set to Operator (all tests).
• From the Scheduler if the Control Selection on the System Control screen is set to Scheduler (Test
without Load, Test with Load, or Extended Parallel tests).
• From an external hardwired input if the Control Selection on the System Control screen is set to
Hardwired Inputs and the test input contact is closed (Test with Load only).

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 16 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.3.10.1 Test without Load On (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system is commanded to enter into Test without Load.
2. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
3. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
4. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
5. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within each PCC.
6. The 52-GMA and 52-GMB breakers remain open.
7. Load Demand operates if it is enabled.

3.3.10.2 Test without Load Off (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system test command is removed from the system.
2. The DMC removes the start signals from the generator sets.
3. The PCC on each generator set opens its generator set breaker.
4. The generator sets run in cooldown mode and then stop.
5. The system returns to normal standby conditions.

3.3.10.3 Test with Load On - TP1 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system is commanded to enter into Test with Load.
2. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
3. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set's start signal is removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is required.)
4. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
5. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
6. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
7. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
8. When the Transfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTA breaker to open. The 52-UTA
breaker opens.
9. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
10. After the 52-UTA breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
11. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC verifies that the Min. Capacity to Connect
is still true.
12. The DMC commands the 52-GMA breaker to close. The 52-GMA breaker closes and the Min.
Capacity to Connect timer stops and resets.
13. The Loadbus is powered by the generator set source.
14. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
15. Load demand operates if it is enabled.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 17 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.3.10.4 Test with Load Off - TP1 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system test command is removed from the system.
2. The system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.3 on page 13.

3.3.10.5 Test with Load On - TP2 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system is commanded to enter into Test with Load.
2. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
3. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set's start signal is removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is required.)
4. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
5. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
6. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
7. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
8. When the Transfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UTB breaker to open. The 52-UTB
breaker opens.
9. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
10. After the 52-UTB breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
11. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC verifies that the Min. Capacity to Connect
is still true.
12. The DMC commands the 52-GMB breaker to close. The 52-GMB breaker closes and the Min.
Capacity to Connect timer stops and resets.
13. The Loadbus is powered by the generator set source.
14. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
15. Load demand operates if it is enabled.

3.3.10.6 Test with Load Off - TP2 (Auto - Open Transition)


1. The system test command is removed from the system.
2. The system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.5 on page 14.

3.4 Normal Load Control


3.4.1 Load Control Levels
Normal load control uses two sets of levels for control. Each load is assigned to a load add (0–8) and
shed level (0–7). A load add or shed level can have one or more loads assigned to it. A single load may
only have 1 level for add and 1 level for shed assigned to it.
A load assigned to Load Add Level 0 is not part of the Load Add sequence and is assigned to Load Shed
Level 0. A load assigned to an add level of 0 is forced to have a shed level of 0. This is useful for future
loads.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 18 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

Add levels are used to control the load stepping onto the generator sets while they are connecting to the
Genbus. Level 1 is the first load to add. Level 2 is the second load to add, and so forth up to the total
number of load add levels in the system.
Shed levels are used to handle load removal from the Genbus if the DMC receives a Load Dump signal
from the generator sets. Level 1 is the first load to shed. Level 2 is the second load to shed, and so forth
up to the total number of load shed levels in the system. A shed level of 0 is used for critical loads that
should never shed. Because a level 0 load never sheds, it cannot have an add level higher than 1 since it
is assumed to be on the Genbus when the generator sets connect.
Shed level assignment can be done automatically by the DMC based on the load add level or user
defined. When the shed sequence is automatically determined, the loads shed in the reverse order that
they were added. When user defined, the restrictions stated above for shed level 0 still apply.

3.4.2 Load Control Sizing


When sizing system loads to generator sets, load(s) assigned to Load Add Level 1 should not exceed the
kW capacity of the smallest generator set in the system. Loads assigned to Load Add Level 2 should not
exceed the kW capacity of the smallest two generator sets in the system. This philosophy should continue
for all of the generator sets in the system until the Required Online Capacity is reached. This is important
when the generator sets in the system are not the same size. Starting with the smallest generator set
takes into account the worst case sizing scenario.

3.4.3 Load Control Timing


The Genbus has two time delays for controlling the load.
• Genbus Delay - The amount of time that must expire before adding the next load add level. The
delay ensures that loads do not add too rapidly if the generator sets parallel with each other on the
Genbus too quickly.
• Shed Delay - The amount of time that must expire before shedding the next load shed level. The
delay allows the system to stabilize before shedding load too rapidly and possibly dropping more
load than required to clear an overload condition.

3.4.4 Load Add Sequence during Loss of Utility Source


1. Each load is assigned to a load add level.
2. When the first generator set connects to the Loadbus, all loads assigned to Load Add level 1 are
commanded to add.
3. The Genbus Delay starts timing.
4. When the second generator set connects to the Loadbus and the Genbus Delay has expired, all
loads assigned to Load Add level 2 are commanded to add.
5. The Genbus Delay resets and starts timing for the newly added load add level.
6. The sequence continues until the Required Online Capacity for the Loadbus is met or when all
existing generator sets connect to the Loadbus. Any remaining levels are added separated by the
Genbus Delay.
7. In the event that the Required Online Capacity for the Loadbus is not met and not all existing
generator sets connect to the Loadbus, the DMC only adds load levels equal to the number of
generator sets online. Any further load add levels need to be added using the manual commands on
the Load Control screen. The operator is responsible for verifying that enough capacity exists to add
a specific level. Levels do not need to be added in order.
8. If an overload condition occurs for any reason, load adding stops and the system starts the load
shed sequence.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 19 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.4.5 Load Add Sequence during Return to Utility Source


1. Each load on the Loadbus is assigned to a load add level.
2. A level 1 load add command is issued even though all loads assigned to Load Add Level 1 should
already be connected to the Loadbus.
3. The Utility Delay starts timing as soon as the 52-UM breaker closes.
4. When the Utility Delay expires, all loads assigned to Load Add level 2 are commanded to add.
5. The Utility Delay resets and starts timing for the next load add level.
6. The sequence continues until all load add levels are commanded to add.

3.4.6 Load Shed Sequence


1. Each load is assigned to a load shed level.
2. One or more connected generator sets send a Load Dump signal to the DMC.
3. Upon detection of an overload (Load Dump) signal from any generator set, the smallest non-zero
load shed level that is connected to the Genbus is instantly turned on. Typically, Load Shed Level 1.
It may not be level 1 if load add did not complete before the overload condition occurred or if Load
Shed Level 1 was not assigned to a load.
4. The Shed Delay starts timing.
5. When the Shed Delay expires, the DMC continues to monitor the Load Dump signal. If the signal is
still present, the next load shed level that is connected to the Genbus is turned on. Typically, Load
Shed Level 2.
6. The Shed Delay time resets and starts timing for the next load shed level.
7. The sequence continues until all shed levels that were connected to the Genbus turn on (except
Load Shed Level 0) or the DMC detects that the Load Dump signal has been removed by the
generator sets.
8. When the overload condition is no longer active, the operator resets the overload alarm and restores
load shed levels on the Load Control screen. Restoration of shed levels does not need to be done in
order. Loads that have been shed cannot be restored until the overload alarm is cleared.
9. As long as the system is on generator set source, there is no automatic restore for levels that have
been shed. They must be manually restored by the operator.
10. If an overload condition occurs while the system is on generator set source during Test with Load in
Auto - Open Transition and Authorized Return to Utility is not selected, the test is immediately
terminated and the system is retransferred to the Utility Source without shedding any loads. If
Authorized Return to Utility is selected, the system stays in Test with Load and follows the normal
shed sequence.
11. If a restored level causes an overload condition, restoration of levels is stopped and the load shed
sequence starts again.
12. If the system is retransferred to the utility source when there are still shed levels active, the sheds
are automatically cleared and the load levels restored to the utility source.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 20 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.4.7 Quick Shed


Quick Shed is used when the failure of a generator set will have a significant effect on the stability of the
generator set supply to the load. When Quick Shed is enabled and a generator set shutdown is detected,
all load shed levels are shed except for Load Shed Level 0. The load add sequence is restarted and load
add levels are added on a timed basis until the number of generator sets connected to the Genbus equals
the load add level. If the Required Online Capacity for the Genbus is met again, even with a generator set
shutdown, loads are added on a timed basis until all levels are added.

3.4.8 Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed


When transferring to a utility source, the DMC allows the capability for feeder breakers to remain closed
during the open transition transfer. When the Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed checkbox is
selected on the Setup screen, it will block load the utility source with the facility load as soon as the utility
main breaker closes. This reduces the number of cycles on the feeder breakers and the amount of time
load is unpowered during the transition to the utility source.

3.5 Load Demand


Load demand is used to match generating capacity to the load in order to optimize fuel efficiency and
prolong generator set life while maintaining the right amount of reserve capacity for the customer's
application. Either generator set operating percentage or facility load steps can be used to determine the
number of generator sets to run for a specific load. The Load Demand Sequence and Load Demand
Setpoints are set up on the Load Demand screen. After the parameters are set up, the system follows the
selected load demand sequence.
The load demand sequence is automatically adjusted if a generator set warning alarm occurs. The
generator set that has a warning fault is moved to the lowest priority in the sequence. If all generator sets
are not required to supply the load, the generator set with the fault is the first to shut down to reduce the
risk that the warning condition could develop into a more serious fault.
The following conditions can inhibit or cancel load demand. All load demand stop commands are
removed.
• An active overload condition
• System is set to Manual mode on the System Control screen (no generator set restart until the
system is returned to Auto - Open Transition or Auto - Soft Closed Transition)
• Genbus metering failure
• Generator set I/O island failure
• System is in Extended Parallel and the Generator Bus %kW Load Control Type is selected.
• Load Demand is disabled on the Load Demand screen.

3.5.1 Load Demand Sequence


3.5.1.1 Run Hours Monitoring
The load demand sequence changes based on the engine run hours of the generator sets in the system.
The generator sets with the lowest run hours have the highest priority in the load demand sequence and
accumulate more run hours than the lower priority generator sets. The amount of difference between the
engine hours before the load demand sequence is adjustable from 1–500 hours.

3.5.1.2 Auto Rotate


The load demand sequence changes every time load demand is activated. The lead unit becomes the
lowest priority generator set and all other generator sets in the system increase in priority by one level.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 21 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3.5.1.3 User Defined


The load demand sequence is set up by the operator. The operator changes the sequence to increase the
system reliability in the case of a generator set warning.

3.5.2 Load Demand Setpoints


The set points used depend on the load demand sequence selected.
The DMC automatically shuts down and restarts generator sets in an order determined by the load
demand sequence selected. Generator set faults can cause the DMC to automatically reorder the
sequence. The sequence is shown in alphabetical order, such as Lead (A), B, and so on depending on the
total number of generator sets in the system.
The shutdown and restart sequence determines the order in which generator sets are shut down and
restarted. The sequence is defined in the order, Lead (A) unit, B unit, C unit, D unit, etc. Each letter is
assigned a generator set number. Each generator set in the sequence can only appear once. All of the
generator sets in the sequence must be part of the system (does not include future generator sets). The
shutdown order is executed in reverse alphabetical order. The restart order is executed in alphabetical
order. The lead unit is the highest priority and is never shut down.

3.5.2.1 Percent or Absolute kW


The shutdown and restart set points can use %kW or Absolute kW to determine the thresholds for starting
and stopping the generator sets. The default unit is %kW. The larger the site is, the %kW method is less
efficient since the reserve capacity is a percentage rather than a fixed amount. The Absolute kW value
should be used under the following conditions:
• There are more than 4 generator sets in the system.
• The system fuel efficiency has high importance.
• The system redundancy, such as N+1 for the generator sets has high importance.
Absolute kW requires that the load profile of the site be understood well enough to determine spinning
reserve requirements.

3.5.2.1.1 Shutdown %kW (Percent kW)


The percentage of the load that will be carried by the remaining generator sets once a generator set is
shut down by load demand. The actual load on the generator sets must be less than this value prior to a
generator set shutdown. The shutdown %kW must be at least 5 percent smaller than the restart %kW.

3.5.2.1.2 Restart %kW (Percent kW)


The percentage of online load with respect to the online generator set capacity that must be exceeded to
restart the next generator set in the load demand sequence.

3.5.2.1.3 Shutdown kW (Absolute kW)


Shutdown kW must be set to a number greater than the Restart kW. It should be set based upon how
rapidly and how much load can decrease. If set too low, generator sets will cycle on and off too frequently.
If set too high, system efficiency will decrease since more generator sets will be running than needed. The
shutdown capacity is the amount of reserve capacity that will be left when the lowest priority generator set
shuts down. This should be at least 5% of the generator set capacity more than the restart kW, or more if
the loads that cycle repetitively are larger than this value. The actual pickup and dropout point for each
generator set in the system can be viewed once the set points have been entered.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 22 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.5.2.1.4 Restart kW (Absolute kW)


Restart kW is the minimum amount of spare online capacity that the system will always try to maintain,
i.e., the spinning reserve amount. The setting depends on system requirements. To maintain additional
generation to cover for a failure of generator sets, setting the Restart kW greater than the size of one
generator set ensures that there is some reserve capacity after the generator set goes offline. If fuel
economy is more important, the restart kW should be the largest amount of load increase that can happen
before the system is able to add another generator set.

3.5.2.2 Initial Delay


The time that the DMC waits after load demand is enabled and all conditions for load demand have been
met before load demand becomes active.

3.5.2.3 Shutdown Delay


The time the PLC waits before shutting down a generator set if the facility load is sufficiently low. The
Shutdown Delay is used to place the appropriate number of generator sets in load demand stop for the
load required by the Genbus. When load demand is enabled, the system calculates the generator sets
that can be shut down. Any generator set that has a Shutdown kW that is less than the load kW initiates
the Shutdown Delay. If more than one generator set has a Shutdown kW that is less than the load kW, the
Shutdown Delay begins timing 5 seconds apart so that the generator sets will be stopped sequentially
every 5 seconds.

3.5.2.4 Restart Delay


The Restart Delay is the time required for the Genbus to be at or greater than the restart capacity. The
delay helps prevent a generator set from restarting unnecessarily due to load transients.

3.5.2.5 Run Hour Differential (Run Hours)


The minimum difference of run hours between the generator sets for the Run Hours load demand
sequence.

3.5.2.6 Spare Capacity Pick Up


The system has a remote input contact that allows the load demand to respond to large load steps. When
the input is on, load demand adds the spare capacity pick up kW to the actual load and starts enough
generator sets to make sure that the generator sets can supply the additional load. This is useful for
facilities that have large loads that are periodically added to the system. The load demand set points are
optimized to reduce fuel consumption of the generator sets and provide a means to start large loads.

3.6 Authorized Return to Utility Required


Authorized Return to Utility Required is used to inhibit the automatic retransfer back to the utility source
until it is manually initiated by the operator. This selection is on the Setup screen. When selected, the
confirmation to retransfer appears on the Oneline screen to allow the operator to authorize the retransfer.

3.7 Generator Set Manual Operation


When Manual mode is selected in the HMI, no automatic operations are performed by the DMC. All
generator set start/stop and any breaker open/close must be initiated by the operator.

3.7.1 Manual Operation from the HMI


1. The operator initiates this mode by selecting the Transition Type Manual radio button on the System
Control screen.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 23 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

2. This mode allows the operator to start/stop each generator set and open/close each generator set
breaker on the Generator Summary screen.

NOTICE
The generator set breakers cannot be closed in Manual mode unless the Loadbus is
confirmed dead.

3. This mode allows the operator to open/close utility main and generator main breakers on the Oneline
screen.

NOTICE
The utility main and generator main breakers cannot be closed in Manual mode under
certain conditions.

4. The operator exits this mode by selecting a Transition Type of Auto - Open Transition or Auto - Soft
Closed Transition on the System Control screen.

3.7.2 Manual Operation from the PCC


This mode can be used if the DMC fails and it becomes necessary to start the generator sets and connect
them to the Loadbus.
1. Place the mode control switch for the transfer pair in Manual.
2. Place the generator set in Manual from the local generator set PCC.
3. Control the utility main and generator main breakers with their individual breaker control switches on
the front of the switchgear.
4. The utility main and generator main breakers are electrically interlocked to prevent any manual
closed transition operation.
5. Start each generator set manually and close its generator set breaker to a dead bus from the PCC.
Refer to the specific generator set manual to perform this function.
6. When the generator sets are connected to the Loadbus, follow the facility safety procedures to
manually add additional loads if sufficient capacity exists.
7. Return the generator sets to standby mode by disconnecting facility loads per the facility procedures.
Open each generator set breaker and shut down each generator set from the respective PCC.
8. Switch each generator set control switch from Manual to Auto mode at the local generator set PCC.
9. The mode control switch of the transfer pair should be returned to Auto mode after the utility main
and generator main breakers are returned to normal standby conditions.

3.8 Load Bank / Temporary Generator Set Sequence


3.8.1 Load Bank Test On
1. On the DMC B door, ensure that the two-position selector switch is in the Load Bank mode.
2. On the HMI, navigate to the Load Bank Control screen.
3. Enable the Load Bank Control Mode.
4. Select the generator set to be controlled from the dropdown menu. Open the control fly-out.
5. Select the Generator Start button to start the selected generator set.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 24 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

6. Select the Generator CB Close button to close the selected generator set breaker.
7. Additional generator sets can be started and brought online by making selections from the dropdown
menu.
8. Once at least one generator set is online, select the Load Bank CB Close button to close the load
bank breaker 52-TG/LB.

NOTICE
If the utility fails during load bank operation, Load Bank Control Mode is canceled, the load bank
breaker opens instantly, and the system is restored for loss of normal power mode of operation.

NOTICE
If the PLC fails, the PLC Malfunction Relay in the DMC is used to trip the 52-TG/LB breaker and
prevents it from reclosing until the PLC is operational again.

3.8.2 Load Bank Test Off


1. To end load bank test operation, disable the Load Bank Control Mode.
2. The Load Bank Breaker opens.
3. The generator set paralleling breaker(s) open(s).
4. The generator set(s) enter cooldown mode.
5. The system returns to Standby mode of operation.

3.8.3 Paralleling Temporary Generator Set (TG) Sequence - Loss


of Normal Source
Initial Conditions: On the DMC B door, ensure that the two-position selector switch is in the Temp Gen
mode. 52-TG/LB breaker has been closed.
1. The DMC receives a loss of normal source signal from the device monitoring the utility source.
2. A configurable Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.
3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
4. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
5. The Temporary Generator Set is inhibited from closing to the Genbus.
6. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System. Once the first
generator set is online, the inhibit is removed from the Temporary Generator Set.

NOTICE
If no permanent generator sets are available to come online, the inhibit on the Temporary
Generator Set is removed.

7. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
8. The generator sets proportionally share load.
9. Load Demand operates if it is enabled, as described in the Section 3.5 on page 21 section.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 25 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

NOTICE
If the PLC fails, the PLC Malfunction Relay in the DMC is used to trip the 52-LB/TG breaker and
prevents it from reclosing until the PLC is operational again.

3.8.4 Paralleling Temporary Generator Set (TG) Sequence -


Return of Normal Source
NOTICE
The return of normal source sequence is not affected by the presence of the Temporary
Generator Set.

3.9 Failure Modes


3.9.1 Generator Set Failures
3.9.1.1 Generator Set Fail to Start
If a generator set fails to start after the over crank or fail to crank time delay (set in the PCC) expires, the
generator set shuts down and an alarm sounds on the DMC.

3.9.1.2 Generator Set Fail to Synchronize


If a generator set fails to synchronize after a preset time delay (set in the PCC), an alarm sounds on the
DMC and the generator set continues attempting to synchronize until signaled to stop by an operator
either on the PCC or Generator Summary screen.

3.9.1.3 Generator Set Fail to Come Online


If an available generator set fails to come online after the time delay (set in the DMC) expires, an alarm
sounds on the DMC.

3.9.1.4 Generator Set Breaker Fail to Close


If a generator set breaker fails to close, an alarm sounds on the DMC and the generator set may or may
not shut down depending on how it is configured in the PCC. The operator resets the alarm at the PCC
and DMC.

3.9.1.5 Generator Set Breaker Fail to Open


If a generator set breaker fails to open, an alarm sounds on the DMC and the unit continues to run with
the fail to open warning. When the breaker opens, the operator resets the alarm at the PCC and DMC.

3.9.1.6 Generator Set Breaker Fail to Open on Shutdown


If a generator set breaker fails to open and the generator set shuts down, an alarm sounds on the DMC.
The other generator sets are inhibited and start signals are removed to isolate the failed generator set.
The failed generator set must be disconnected from the bus to reset the alarm at the DMC.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 26 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

3.9.2 52-UT(x) Breakers Failures (Auto - Open Transition)


NOTICE
52-UT(x) represents 52-UTA or 52-UTB breakers. 52-GM represents 52-GMA or 52-GMB breakers.
Failure scenarios are the same for 'A' side or ‘B’ side main breakers.

3.9.2.1 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Open during Loss of Utility Source


1. The DMC receives a loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility source.
2. The Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.
3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
4. The DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to open. The 52-UT(x) breaker does not open.
5. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
6. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
7. The DMC removes the open command and sets the “52-UT(x) Fail to Open” alarm on the DMC.
8. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
9. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set’s start signal is not removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is not required.)
10. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
11. The DMC resets the Fail to Open alarm and commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to open. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
12. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
13. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
14. The DMC removes the open command and sets the “52-UT(x) Fail to Open” alarm on the DMC.
15. The DMC sends a close signal to 52-UT(x) in case it was open and the feedback status was
incorrect.
16. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
17. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
18. The generator sets continue to run.

3.9.2.2 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Open Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-UT(x) breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is not available, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.2 or
Section 3.3.4.

3.9.2.3 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Open during Test with Load On


1. The system is commanded to enter into Test with Load.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 27 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

2. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.


3. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts.
4. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
5. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
6. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
7. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
8. When the Transfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to open. The 52-UT(x)
breaker fails to open.
9. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
10. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not open.
11. The DMC removes the open command.
12. The "52-UT(x) Fail to Open" alarm is registered on the DMC.
13. The DMC sends a close signal to 52-UT(x) in case it was open and the feedback status was
incorrect.
14. The system is removed from Test with Load.
15. The DMC removes the start signals from the generator sets.
16. The PCC on each generator set opens its generator set breaker.
17. The generator sets run in cooldown mode and then stop.
18. The facility remains powered by the utility source.

3.9.2.4 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Open Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-UT(x) breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. The system returns to normal standby conditions and does not reenter the test automatically.

3.9.2.5 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Close on Return of Utility Source or Test


with Load Off
1. The DMC detects the removal of the loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility
source.
2. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC.
3. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GM breaker to open. The 52-GM
breaker opens.
4. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
5. After the 52-GM breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to close.
The 52-UT(x) breaker fails to close.
7. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not close.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 28 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

8. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-UT(x)
breaker does not close.
9. The DMC removes the close command.
10. The "52-UT(x) Fail to Close" alarm is registered on the DMC.
11. The DMC sends an open signal to 52-UT(x) in case it was closed and the feedback status was
incorrect.
12. The DMC commands the 52-GM breaker to close. The 52-GM breaker closes.
13. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.4 on page 19.
14. Load Demand operates if it is enabled.

3.9.2.6 52-UT(x) Breaker Fail to Close Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-UT(x) breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the source is available, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.3 or Section
3.3.5.
3. If the utility source is not available, the facility remains powered by the generator set source.

3.9.3 52-GM Breaker Failures (Auto - Open Transition)


3.9.3.1 52-GM Breaker Fail to Open on Return of Utility Source or Test
with Load Off
1. The system is powered by the generator set source.
2. The system is removed from Test with Load or the utility source returns.
3. The Retransfer Delay starts in the DMC.
4. When the Retransfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-GM breaker to open. The 52-GM
breaker fails to open.
5. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-GM breaker
does not open.
6. The DMC removes the open command and then reapplies the open command. The 52-GM breaker
does not open.
7. The DMC removes the open command.
8. The "52-GM Fail to Open" alarm is registered on the DMC.
9. The DMC sends a close signal to 52-GM in case it was open and the feedback status was incorrect.
10. The generator sets continue to run and power the Loadbus.

3.9.3.2 52-GM Breaker Fail to Open Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-GM breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is available, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.3 or
Section 3.3.5.
3. If the utility source is not available, the facility remains powered by the generator set source.

3.9.3.3 52-GM Breaker Fail to Close during Loss of Utility Source


1. The DMC receives a loss of utility source signal from the device monitoring the utility source.
2. The Utility Fail Delay within the DMC starts and expires.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 29 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.


4. The DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to open. The 52-UT(x) breaker opens.
5. After the 52-UT(x) breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
6. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts. (The generator set’s start signal is not removed if the Min.
Capacity to Connect is not reached before the time expires. Operator intervention is not required.)
7. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
8. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.
9. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
10. The Transfer Delay starts and expires in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached.
(Transfer Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
11. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
12. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires and the Transfer time delay is complete, the DMC
commands the 52-GM breaker to close. The 52-GM breaker fails to close.
13. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-GM breaker
does not close.
14. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-GM breaker
does not close.
15. The DMC removes the close command.
16. The "52-GM Fail to Close" alarm is registered on the DMC.
17. The DMC sends an open signal to 52-GM in case it was closed and the feedback status was
incorrect.
18. The 52-UT(x) breaker and feeders remain open and wait for the utility to return or for the alarm to be
cleared.
19. The generator sets continue to run.
20. The facility load remains unpowered.
21. If the utility source returns, the 52-UT(x) breaker and feeders close.

3.9.3.4 52-GM Breaker Fail to Close Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-GM breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is not available, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.2or
Section 3.3.4.
3. If the utility source is available, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.3or
Section 3.3.5.

3.9.3.5 52-GM Breaker Fail to Close during Test with Load On


1. The system is commanded to enter into Test with Load.
2. The DMC sends a start signal to the generator sets.
3. The Min. Capacity to Connect timer starts.
4. The generator sets start automatically and independently, and accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency.
5. The first generator set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 30 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 3. Sequence of Operation

6. The remaining generator sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective generator set
breakers when synchronization conditions are met within their PCCs.
7. The Transfer Delay starts in the DMC when the Min. Capacity to Connect is reached. (Transfer
Delay stops and resets if the capacity drops below the setpoint.)
8. When the Transfer Delay expires, the DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to open. The 52-UT(x)
breaker opens.
9. All feeder breakers not assigned to Load Shed Level 0 are commanded to open.
10. After the 52-UT(x) breaker opens, the Programmed Transition Delay starts in the DMC.
11. When the Programmed Transition Delay expires, the DMC verifies that the Min. Capacity to Connect
is true.
12. The DMC commands the 52-GM breaker to close. The 52-GM breaker fails to close.
13. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-GM breaker
does not close.
14. The DMC removes the close command and then reapplies the close command. The 52-GM breaker
does not close.
15. The DMC removes the close command.
16. The "52-GM Fail to Close" alarm is registered on the DMC.
17. The system is removed from Test with Load.
18. The DMC commands the 52-UT(x) breaker to close. The 52-UT(x) breaker closes.
19. The normal load add sequence starts as described in Section 3.4.5.
20. The Loadbus is powered by the utility source.
21. The DMC removes the start signals from the generator sets.
22. The PCC on each generator set opens its generator set breaker.
23. The generator sets run in cooldown mode and then stop.

3.9.3.6 52-GM Breaker Fail to Close Reset


1. The operator clears the fault on the 52-GM breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. The system returns to normal standby conditions and does not reenter the test automatically.

3.9.4 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout Failures


3.9.4.1 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout During Normal Standby Conditions
1. The system is in normal standby conditions.
2. The protective relay on the 52-UT(x) breaker detects a lockout condition.
3. The protective relay direct trips and locks out the 52-UT(x) breaker.
4. The "52-UT(x) Lockout Trip" alarm is registered on the DMC.
5. No further action is taken. The DMC will not close a source to the Loadbus until the lockout relay is
reset.

3.9.4.2 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout Reset


1. The operator resets the lockout relay on the 52-UT(x) breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is available, the 52-UT(x) breaker closes if no other source is online.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 31 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


3. Sequence of Operation 7-2019

3. If the utility source is not available, the system starts generators sets upon utility failure but does not
close the GM to the loadbus. Upon reset, the system follows the sequence described in Section
3.3.2 or Section 3.3.4.

3.9.4.3 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout during Test without Load


1. The system is in Test without Load.
2. The protective relay on the 52-UT(x) breaker detects a lockout condition.
3. The protective relay direct trips and locks out the 52-UT(x) breaker.
4. The "52-UT(x) Lockout Trip" alarm is registered on the DMC.
5. The generator sets continue to run unaffected in Test without Load.
6. The operator can exit Test without Load at any time.

3.9.4.4 52-UT(x) Breaker Lockout Reset


1. The operator resets the lockout relay on the 52-UT(x) breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is available, the 52-UT(x) breaker closes if no other source is online.
3. If the utility source is not available, the system starts generators sets upon utility failure but does not
close the GM to the loadbus. Upon reset, the system follows the sequence described in Section
3.3.2 on page 13 or Section 3.3.4 on page 14.

3.9.5 52-GM Breaker Lockout Failures


3.9.5.1 52-GM Breaker Lockout during Utility Source Failure
1. The system is powered by the generator set source.
2. The protective relay on the 52-GM breaker detects a lockout condition.
3. The protective relay direct trips and locks out the 52-GM breaker.
4. The "52-GM Lockout Trip" alarm is registered on the DMC.
5. The generators sets continue to run.
6. The DMC will not close another source to the Loadbus until the lockout relay is reset.

3.9.5.2 52-GM Breaker Lockout Reset


1. The operator resets the lockout relay on the 52-GM breaker and resets the alarm on the DMC.
2. If the utility source is available, the 52-UM breaker closes if no other source is online.
3. If the utility source is unavailable, the system follows the sequence described in Section 3.3.2 on
page 13 or Section 3.3.4.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 32 A063J840 (Issue 1)


4 Human-Machine Interface
The Human-Machine Interface (HMI) provides a user interface to monitor, operate, and control the DMC
using a touchscreen.

NOTICE
The screenshots provided in this section are typical screen shots and may contain information
that is not part of all systems. Projects may contain only a portion of the screens shown. Refer to
project screens and associated help files for project specific details.

4.1 User Access Levels


The HMI supports 4 types of access levels:
• Guest
• Operator
• Manager
• Technician
Guest is the default level of security. All others require the user to log in.
The permissions for each access level are shown below.

TABLE 4. ACCESS LEVEL PERMISSIONS

Security Level
Function
Guest Operator Manager Technician
Monitor system X X X X
Control system X X X
Change password X X X
Delete Files X X
Add/remove Operator and Manager
X X
level users
Add/remove Technician level users X
Setup/change system settings X
Run diagnostics X

NOTICE
Functions that are grayed out (not available) in the HMI indicate that the user does not have the
correct level of permission to perform the function.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 33 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

4.2 Initial Screen


The Oneline diagram screen is the initial screen displayed on the touchscreen. There are 4 main areas
displayed on every screen:
• Header
• Utility Navigation Toolbar
• Primary Navigation Toolbar
• Content Area

FIGURE 3. INITIAL SCREEN

4.2.1 Header
The Header is displayed at the top of every screen and contains the screen title, transition type, date, and
time.

FIGURE 4. HEADER

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 34 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

4.2.2 Utility Navigation Toolbar


The Utility Navigation Toolbar is displayed on the top right corner of every screen.

FIGURE 5. UTILITY NAVIGATION TOOLBAR


The Utility Navigation Toolbar contains the product name and access to the information and settings
shown in the table below. Touch an icon to select it.

TABLE 5. UTILITY NAVIGATION TOOLBAR ICONS

Icon Name Description


Language Used to change the HMI language.
Displayed only when the language of the HMI can be changed.
The languages shown are examples. Other languages may be
available. Only the available languages are displayed for
selection.

Current Alarm Displays the Current Alarm screen.


The number of active alarms is displayed on the top left of the
icon.
The background of the icon flashes red when there is an
unacknowledged active alarm.
Help Displays the Help screen for the current screen.

Information Displays the Information screen showing project details and


contact information.

Security If the lock is closed, used to log in.


If the lock is open, used to log out, change password, add or
remove user, and change the automatic user logout time.
Setup Used to gain access to the setup screens.
The icon is grayed out when a user does not have permission to
change settings.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 35 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

4.2.3 Primary Navigation Toolbar


The Primary Navigation Toolbar is displayed on the bottom of every screen. The toolbar only displays the
icons that are applicable to the system.
If the navigation set fits on one bar, the arrows on the end of the bar are both grayed out. When,
highlighted, select the right arrow to display the next navigation set and select the left arrow to go back to
the main navigation set.

FIGURE 6. PRIMARY NAVIGATION TOOLBAR


The Primary Navigation Toolbar provides access to the system screens. Grayed out icons are not
available for selection. Touch an icon to select its associated screen.

NOTICE
By default, the Primary Navigation Toolbar is displayed with screen title captions. Some systems
may not include the caption.

4.2.4 Content Area


The content area displays the content of the selected icon from the Utility Navigation Toolbar and Primary
Navigation Toolbar.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 36 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 7. CONTENT AREA EXAMPLE

4.3 Basic Operator Inputs


The screens contain a number of operator input types.
• Buttons
• Text Boxes
• Checkboxes
• Radio Buttons
• Menus
• Entry Validation

4.3.1 Buttons
Select a button to perform the desired action. Some buttons display a popup window asking for more
information or confirmation.
There are 2 types of buttons:
• Momentary - Momentary state when pressed (Submit, OK, Save, Reset, Close, etc.)
• Latch - Maintains its state after being activated (Start, Stop, etc.)

A063J840 (Issue 1) 37 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 8. BUTTON EXAMPLES

4.3.2 Text Boxes


A text box is used for data entry. The color of the text box indicates if an entry can be made or if the entry
is invalid.
• White - Allows data entry
• Gray - Data entry is not allowed
• Orange - Data entry is invalid

FIGURE 9. TEXT BOX EXAMPLES


An AlphaNumeric Virtual Keyboard or numerical keyboard is displayed when a text box on any screen is
selected.

FIGURE 10. KEYBOARDS


Enter the desired information.

To backspace, select the button.

For multi-line text boxes, select the Shift or Caps Lock button to display the button in place of
the button. Select the button to start a new line of text.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 38 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

When the button is displayed, select the Shift or Caps Lock button to display the
button.

To confirm the data entry, select the button.

To cancel the data entry, select the button.

4.3.3 Checkboxes
Checkboxes allow a choice between one of two possible mutually exclusive options. For example, Yes
(checked) or No (unchecked). White space in the checkbox is false (unchecked) and a check mark
indicates true (checked). A series of checkboxes may apply to the same control function.

FIGURE 11. CHECKBOX

4.3.4 Radio Buttons


Radio buttons provide a group of buttons where only one can be selected. A radio button that is selected
shows a dot in the middle of the white space. When a radio button is selected, any previously selected
radio button in the same group becomes deselected.

FIGURE 12. RADIO BUTTONS

4.3.5 Drop-down Menus


Drop-down menus allow selection of an item from a list. A typical list contains the devices in the system.
The item that is currently selected in the list is highlighted in blue.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 39 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 13. DROP-DOWN MENU

4.3.6 Entry Validation


Some operator inputs require validation of the entry. When validation is required, the outer layer of the
container changes color to indicate the state of the input. An entry goes through the following states:
• Modified (orange) - Indicates that an entry has been made.
• Failed (red) - Indicates that the entry is invalid.
• Success/Pass (green) - Indicates that the entry is valid.
The failed state requires the entry to be canceled or corrected.

FIGURE 14. ENTRY VALIDATION EXAMPLES

4.3.7 Help Screens


Select the button on any screen to display its help screen.

Select the button on any help screen to display the Basic User Guide help screen.

Select the button on the Basic User Guide help screen to return to the original help screen.

4.4 Current Alarm Screen


The Current Alarm screen provides a list of all active alarms. Alarms are displayed until the alarm
condition no longer exists and the alarm has been acknowledged. The alarm color and symbol in the left
column indicate its status.
• Red - Active alarm that has not been acknowledged (warning symbol indicates alarm has not been
acknowledged).
• Green - Active alarm that has been acknowledged (check mark indicates alarm has been
acknowledged).
• Blue - Inactive alarm that has not been acknowledged (warning symbol indicates alarm has not been
acknowledged).

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 40 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 15. CURRENT ALARM SCREEN


An arrow in the column heading indicates that the list can be sorted by the data in the column in
ascending or descending order.
To acknowledge an alarm, select the alarm in the list.
To acknowledge all alarms and silence the audible horn, reset inactive alarms, or print the alarm table;
select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the screen to open the control panel.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 41 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 16. CONTROL PANEL

TABLE 6. CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Active Button Description


Select to acknowledge all alarms and silence the
audible alarm horn.

Select to reset all inactive alarms.

Select to print the alarm table.

4.5 Security
4.5.1 Login
1. Select the Security (locked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 42 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 17. LOGIN SCREEN


2. Enter the User Name (tech is the default user name for technician).
3. Enter the Password.

4. Select the button to log in.

To cancel, select the button.

To display the Help screen, select the button.

4.5.2 Logout
1. Select the Security (unlocked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

FIGURE 18. LOGOUT SCREEN

2. Select the button to log out.

To cancel, select the button.

To display the Help screen, select the button.

4.5.3 Change Password


1. Select the Security (unlocked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 43 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 19. LOGOUT SCREEN

2. Select the button.

FIGURE 20. CHANGE PASSWORD SCREEN


3. Enter the Current Password.
4. Enter the New Password.
5. Enter the Confirm Password.

6. Select the button to confirm.

To cancel, select the button.

4.5.4 Automatic User Logout


1. Select the Security (unlocked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 44 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 21. LOGOUT SCREEN

2. Select the button.

FIGURE 22. AUTOMATIC USER LOGOUT SCREEN


3. Enter the amount of time to automatically logout after no HMI action has taken place or enter 0 to
disable the automatic user logout. Default is 10 minutes.

4. Select the button to close the screen.

4.5.5 Add User


1. Select the Security (unlocked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

FIGURE 23. LOGOUT SCREEN

2. Select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 45 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 24. ADD USER SCREEN


3. Enter the User Name.
4. Enter the Password.
5. Enter the Confirm Password.
6. Select the Operator, Manager, or Technician radio button.

7. Select the button to add the user.

To cancel, select the button.

4.5.6 Remove User


1. Select the Security (unlocked) icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

FIGURE 25. LOGOUT SCREEN

2. Select the button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 46 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 26. REMOVE USER SCREEN


3. Enter the User Name of the user to be removed.

4. Select the button to remove the user.

To cancel, select the button.

4.6 Setup
To set up email addresses, SMTP settings, printer settings, and access the system setup screens; select
the Setup icon on the Utility Navigation Toolbar.

FIGURE 27. SETUP

To set up email addresses for email notifications, select the button.

To set up the outgoing mail server for SMTP, select the button.

To set up printer settings, select the button.

To access the system setup screens, select the button.

To cancel, select the button.

To display the Help screen, select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 47 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

4.6.1 Email Addresses

FIGURE 28. EMAIL ADDRESSES

1. Select the button for the To field and enter the email address(es) that alarm notifications, SMTP
setting confirmations, and reports will be sent to.

2. Select the button for the Cc field and enter the email address(es) that alarm notifications are sent
to.

3. Select the button for the Bcc field and enter the email address(es) that alarm notifications are
sent to without the email address showing on the email.

NOTICE
Each field is limited to 400 characters. If there is more than one recipient, use a semicolon
(;) or comma (,) to separate addresses.

To close the window, select the button.

To display the Help screen, select the button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 48 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

4.6.2 SMTP Settings

FIGURE 29. SMTP SETTINGS


1. Enter the User Name (outgoing email address).
2. Enter the Server address of the outgoing mail server.
3. Enter the Port.

NOTICE
The default port is 25 but may be different for the entered server and network. Consult the
email provider if necessary.

4. Select the appropriate Authentication radio button.


• Not Required - Server does not require authentication.
• Required - Server requires unencrypted authentication.
• Encrypted - Server requires encryption via TLS/SSL.
5. If the server requires authentication, enter the Password.

6. Select the to save the settings. A test email is sent to the users in the To field in Email
Addresses. The DMC indicates either a successful transmission of the email to the SMTP server or
the reason for a failure.

To troubleshoot mail server connectivity, select the button. A ping command is sent to the server.

To close the window, select the button.

To display the Help screen, select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 49 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

4.6.3 Printer Settings

FIGURE 30. PRINTER SETTINGS


Enter the appropriate printer settings.

NOTICE
Landscape page orientation is recommended.

4.6.4 Setup Screens


The setup screens are used to enter PLC program constants. Constants are normally set at the factory
during static testing.

CAUTION
Improper operation can cause equipment damage. Do not make changes to the setup screens
unless authorized by the factory.

See Appendix G on page 219 for actual settings.

4.6.4.1 Generator Set Settings


This setup screen is used to set up generator set settings, and minimum and maximum limits for
generator set parameter gauges. For safety purposes, some parameters can only be modified when the
system is in Manual mode.
Select a generator set from the drop-down menu to display its data.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 50 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 31. GENERATOR SET SETTINGS


To change a generator set name, enter a name up to 10 characters.
To change the generator set CB name, enter a name up to 8 characters.
The kW Rating, PCC Type, Node Address, and Connected to Bus for the selected generator set are
displayed. When the kW rating is greater than 0, the DMC considers the generator set to exist in the
system for display and calculation purposes. When the kW Rating is greater than 0, the PowerCommand
Control (PCC) Type indicates the generator set control as follows:
• 1 - 3100
• 2 - 320x
• 3 - 3300
The Node Address for PCC Type 1 and 2 is determined by the PLC. For PCC Type 3, enter the Node
Address (0–98) of the generator set control. The Connected to Bus value is the DMC bus that the
generator set is connected to.
Enter the minimum and maximum parameter values for each generator set gauge (except Frequency) in
Metric units. When US Imperial is selected on the Generator Summary screen, the units are converted.
The Frequency values are set up in the Meter Setup screen since the system frequency should be the
same throughout a facility.

To display the Diagnostics screen, select the button.


To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.4.2 Meter Settings


This setup screen is used to set up meter settings, and minimum and maximum limits for parameter
gauges.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 51 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Select a meter from the drop-down menu to display its data.

FIGURE 32. METER SETTINGS


Select the Enable checkbox to enable an installed meter.
To change a meter name, enter a name up to 16 characters.
The minimum and maximum values of each meter are displayed. To change a value, enter the appropriate
value.
The Frequency values are the system frequency values for the facility.
To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.4.3 System Settings


This screen is used to set up system settings.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 52 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 33. SYSTEM SETTINGS


The current dates and times are displayed.

NOTICE
A USB keyboard is required to change the HMI date and time. Changing the date and time may
cause the HMI to lock the user out. Time stamps of past events and alarms will not be updated
with the new date and time.

NOTICE
Date and time settings should not be changed in the Computer level. Contact the factory to
change in the Application level.

To adjust the HMI date and time, select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 53 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 34. DATE AND TIME WINDOW

Select the button to sync the PLC Date and Time to the HMI date and time.

When in the secondary HMI, the button is shown in place of the HMI and PLC date and time buttons.
Select the button to sync the secondary HMI date and time with the primary HMI date and time.
The Max Ramp Time is used to predict the amount of time the system should ramp load up or down. It is
recommended that the Max Ramp Time be higher than the expected time it takes for the largest size
generator set to ramp up or down with full system load. To change the Max Ramp Time, enter the new
time in seconds.
To enable a user to initiate a retransfer to the utility on the Oneline screen, check the Authorized Return to
Utility Required checkbox.
To change the generator set main breaker name (GM Name), enter a name up to 8 characters. To view or
change settings for the next GM, select the button. Select the button to view previous GM settings.
To change the Utility Name, enter a name up to 13 characters.
The Utility Fail Delay is the amount of time that the DMC waits before transferring the load to the
generator sets after a utility failure. To change the Utility Fail Delay, enter the new time in seconds.
To change the utility main breaker name (UM Name), enter a name up to 8 characters.

To view or change settings for the next utility, select the button. Select the button to view previous
utility settings.
To change the tie breaker name (Tie Name), enter a name up to 8 characters. To view or change settings
for the next tie breaker, select the button. Select the button to view previous tie breaker settings.
To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.4.4 Load Bus 1 Settings


This screen is used to set up Load Add Shed and load control settings for bus 1. The settings can only be
modified when there are no generator sets online to prevent accidental removal of the current load.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 54 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 35. LOAD BUS 1 SETTINGS


The Genbus (generator set bus) Delay is the time that separates the next load add level from the
previously added load level when the generator sets are assuming load. To change the Genbus Delay
time, enter the new time in seconds.
The Utility Bus Delay is the time that separates the next load add level from the previously added load
level when the utility is assuming load. To change the Utility Bus Delay time, enter the new time in
seconds.
The Shed Delay is the time between load shed level signals. The first load shed does not have a time
delay. The Shed Delay timer starts after the first load shed signal is active. If a load shed level does not
get assigned, the time delay will be bypassed for that load level. To change the Shed Delay time, enter
the new time in seconds.
To enable Quick Shed, select the Quick Shed Enable checkbox.
To enable manual assignment of load shed priorities in the Load Control screen, select the Custom Load
Shed Level Assignment checkbox.
To enable load shed when the loads are returned to the utility in open transition, select the Open
Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed checkbox (only applies to breaker devices).

To edit the Load Type, Oneline Name, and/or Load Control Name of a load, select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 55 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 36. EDIT WINDOW


To change the Load Type, select the radio button for the desired Load Type.
To change the Oneline Name, enter a name up to 8 characters.
To change the Load Control Name, enter a name up to 16 characters.

To copy the Oneline Name to the Load Control Name, select the button.

To view additional loads, select the button. Select the button to view previous loads.
To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.4.5 Load Bus Control Settings


This screen is used to set up load bus control settings. The settings can only be modified when there are
no generator sets online to prevent accidental removal of the current load.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 56 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 37. LOAD BUS CONTROL SETTINGS


Required Online Capacity is the kW threshold that separates the way priority levels are added. Priority
levels are added based on the generator sets connected to the load bus. Once the number of generator
sets on the load bus reach the required online capacity, timed load adding begins. To change the kW
value, enter the new value.
The Min. Capacity to Connect is minimum amount of spare capacity required to connect the generator
sets to the load bus via the generator set main breaker (GM). To change the Capacity kW value, enter the
new value.
Time Out is the time before an alarm is initiated if the minimum capacity has not been reached when the
generator sets are signaled to start. To change the value, enter the new time in seconds.
To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.4.6 Load Bank Settings


This screen is used to set up load bank and temporary generator set settings.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 57 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 38. LOAD BANK SETTINGS


Select the appropriate Control Mode Switch radio button.
• Off - Returns the system to its normal standby operation.
• Load Bank - Allows the Enable load bank selection on the Load Bank screen.
• Paralleling Temporary Generator (not shown) - Allows the temporary generator set to be included in
the sequence of operation.
• Non-paralleling Temporary Generator (not shown) - Allows the non-paralleling temporary generator
set to be included in the sequence of operation.
To change the load bank breaker name (LB Name), enter a name up to 8 characters.
To disable load bank and hide the load bank icon on the Oneline screen, select the Future checkbox.
To display a different Setup screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the screen to
display the next or previous screen.

4.6.5 Diagnostic Screens


4.6.5.1 HMI Information
This screen contains information about the HMI.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 58 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 39. HMI INFORMATION


The Watchdog Counter is incremented by the HMI and monitored by the PLC. If the HMI loses
communication with the PLC, the PLC activates the alarm horn.
To display a different Diagnostics screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.6.5.2 PLC Information


This screen contains information about the PLC.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 59 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 40. PLC INFORMATION


The Watchdog Counter is incremented by the PLC and monitored by the HMI.
The Communication Counter has a range of 0–10. If the PLC loses communication for more than 10
seconds, the PLC Communication Failure alarm is activated on the Current Alarm screen.
To display a different Diagnostics screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.
System Exception is normally inactive and is for engineering purposes only. If System Exception is Active,
it is shown in red. A technician can reset the system exception by opening the control panel. Select the left
arrow side bar on the right side of the screen to open the control panel.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 60 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 41. PLC INFORMATION CONTROL PANEL


Select the Exception Reset button to reset the system exception.
To display a different Diagnostics screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.6.5.3 DROP Diagnostic Parameters


This screen displays the diagnostic parameters for a specific DROP.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 61 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 42. DROP DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS


The island ID is displayed on the left side of the screen. To view the next programmed island, select the
button. Select the button to view previous programmed islands. The ID corresponds to the
numerical switch that is on the front of the island. This name is also used in the schematic drawings.
The island graphic shows the link status (green) of the Ethernet ports. The link status blinks red if the link
is not communicating.
If there is a problem with a device on the island, one of the following messages is displayed.
• WARN - Device Warning
• FAIL - Device Failure Alarm
• COM - Communication Failure Alarm
To display a different Diagnostics screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.7 Oneline Screen


The Oneline screen provides a diagram overview of the status and health of the system.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 62 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 43. ONELINE SCREEN

4.7.1 Generator Set Status


The generator set icon contains the following generator set status and health indicators.

Indicator Description Indicator Description


Running (fan spins) Not Running

FIGURE 44. RUNNING STATUS

A063J840 (Issue 1) 63 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Indicator Description Indicator Description


Start Pending Cooldown at Idle

Warm-up at Idle Warning or Derate

Running Shutdown with Cooldown or Shutdown

Cooldown at Rated Load Demand Stop

FIGURE 45. GENERATOR SET STATUS

Indicator Description Indicator Description


Automatic Manual, Run, or Off
(Dependent on Generator Set Control)

FIGURE 46. GENERATOR SET MODE

Indicator Description Indicator Description


Open Failed to Open or Close

Closed

FIGURE 47. NEC STATUS

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 64 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

Select a generator set icon to display its associated Generator Summary screen.

4.7.2 Circuit Breaker Status


The circuit breaker (CB) symbol contains the following status and indicators. A red circuit breaker symbol
indicates energized and green indicates de-energized.

No. Description No. Description


1 Fixed 2 Drawout

FIGURE 48. MOUNTING TYPE


The symbol indicates the CB switch position.

No. Description No. Description


1 Open 4 Disconnected/Rack Out (no longer in its connected
cell position)
2 Closed 5 Earth (line or load side)
3 Unknown (auxiliary contact or communication failure)

FIGURE 49. SWITCH POSITION


There are 6 CB types that are shown on the Oneline screen. The name of the CB is shown in the text on
the top left side of the CB symbol. Additional information associated with the CB type is shown on the
bottom left side of the CB symbol if applicable and space is allowed.

TABLE 7. CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPES

CB Type Cummins CB Names Additional Information


Generator Set 52-G# Load on the generator set (kW)
Generator Set Main 52-GM# Voltage and kW
Utility Main 52-UM# Voltage and kW

A063J840 (Issue 1) 65 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

CB Type Cummins CB Names Additional Information


Feeder 52-F# Load Control Level
+ Load Add Level
– Load Shed Level
Load Bank 52-LB# N/A
Tie 52-T# N/A

No. Description No. Description


1 Failure Warning 3 Synchronizing (flashing)
2 Unexpected Event Warning 4 Manual Mode

FIGURE 50. CIRCUIT BREAKER STATUS


If the individual manual feature is configured for the system, select a main breaker to display a Manual
Control popup window.

FIGURE 51. MANUAL CONTROL POPUP WINDOW (MAIN BREAKER)


When the CB Open button is green, select the button to open the breaker. When the CB Close button is
red, select the button to close the breaker. A gray button is inactive.
If a feeder breaker is electrically operated, select the feeder breaker to display a Manual Control popup
window.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 66 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 52. MANUAL CONTROL POPUP WINDOW (FEEDER BREAKER)


The Manual Control Popup Window is displayed with the CB Open and CB Close buttons inactive (gray).
Select the Manual Enable check box to activate the appropriate button. Select the green CB Open button
to open the breaker. Select the CB Close red button to close the breaker.

4.7.3 Switch Position Status


The switch position symbol contains the following status and indicators.
The symbol indicates the switch position.

No. Description No. Description


1 Open 4 Disconnected/Rack Out (no longer in its connected
cell position)
2 Closed 5 Earth (line or load side)
3 Unknown (communication failure with the I/O)

FIGURE 53. SWITCH POSITION


Select a switch to display its corresponding AC Metering screen.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 67 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

No. Description No. Description


1 Failure Warning 2 Unexpected Event Warning

FIGURE 54. SWITCH POSITION STATUS

4.7.4 Bus Condition


The bus condition is indicated by its color:
• Green = De-energized or dead bus
• Red = Energized or live bus
• Gray = Unknown state indicating one of the following conditions:
◦ Auxiliary contact failure on a source breaker when other source breakers are open
◦ Communication failure on a source breaker.

FIGURE 55. BUS CONDITION


Select the bus line to display the corresponding AC Metering screen.

4.7.5 Automatic Transfer Switch Status


The Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) icon contains the following ATS status and health indicators.
There are 2 types of ATSs:
• Hardwired - Does not indicate energized or de-energized states.
• Networked - Indicates energized (red), de-energized (green), and unknown (gray) states.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 68 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

No. Description No. Description


1 Hardwired 2 Networked

FIGURE 56. ATS TYPES

No. Description No. Description


1 Neutral 3 Emergency (E) (Source 2)
2 Normal (N) (Source 1) 4 Both

FIGURE 57. SWITCH POSITION

A063J840 (Issue 1) 69 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

No. Description No. Description


1 Bypass (applies to Bypass ATS only) 3 Load Control Levels
Indicates that bypass to Source 1 (Normal) or + Load Add Level
Source 2 (Emergency) is active. – Load Shed Level
2 Load Shed
Indicates Load Shed is active.

FIGURE 58. ATS STATUS


Select a networked ATS icon to display its associated ATS Summary screen.

4.7.6 Utility Status


The utility icon contains utility source status indicators.

No. Description No. Description


1 Utility Failure (green windows) 3 Unknown (gray windows)
2 Utility Live (red windows with steam)

FIGURE 59. UTILITY STATUS


Select a utility icon to display the corresponding AC Metering screen.
For transfer pair systems, a red traffic light icon is shown on the Oneline screen when manual control of
the retransfer to utility is allowed (enabled on the System Control screen). A green traffic light icon is
shown when a retransfer to utility has been started. If the retransfer timer is timing to transfer the
generator sets back to the utility, an egg timer icon is shown with the amount of time remaining next to it.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 70 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 60. RETRANSFER UTILITY ON ONELINE SCREEN


Select the red or green traffic light icon to display the Authorize Return to Utility popup window.
Select the egg timer icon to bypass the retransfer delay. Confirm the bypass on the confirmation popup.

FIGURE 61. AUTHORIZE RETURN TO UTILITY POPUP WINDOW


The Authorize Return to Utility popup window is displayed with either the Return Start or Return Stop
buttons active and the other button is gray indicating it is inactive.
Select the Return Start or Return Stop button.

Select the button to close the window.

4.7.7 Load Bank Status


The load bank icon contains the load bank status indicators.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 71 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

No. Description No. Description


1 Connected to Dead Bus (green resistor symbol) 3 Connected to Unknown Bus State (gray resistor
symbol)
2 Connected to Live Bus (red resistor symbol)

FIGURE 62. LOAD BANK STATUS


Select a load bank icon to display the Load Bank screen.

4.7.8 Bus Transformer State


The bus transformer state is indicated by its color:
• Green = De-energized or dead bus
• Red = Energized or live bus
• Gray = Unknown state

FIGURE 63. BUS TRANSFORMER STATE

4.8 Generator Summary Screen


The Generator Summary screen provides digital and graphical displays of critical operating parameters for
each generator set. Bus data is also provided.
Select a generator set from the drop-down menu to display its data.
The generator set symbol contains information about the status of the generator set and its breaker. See
Section 4.7.1 on page 63 and Section 4.7.2 on page 65 for more information.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 72 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 64. GENERATOR SUMMARY SCREEN


Select the appropriate Units to display for the parameters if necessary.
Annunciator indicators show the state of the generator set. An active annunciator state is shown with a
color indicating its severity; otherwise, it is inactive (gray).

4.8.1 Engine and Alternator Data Gauges


Select the small meter on the bottom right corner of the generator set symbol to display the following
Engine Data and Alternator Data gauges.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 73 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 65. ENGINE DATA AND ALTERNATOR GAUGES


The minimum and maximum values are configured in the Setup screen.
If the reading value is outside of the minimum and maximum range:
• Minimum or maximum value is shown in red.
• Red needle points to 10 degrees off the range.
• Reading value flashes red.
Select an individual gauge to display it in a larger size.

FIGURE 66. LARGE GAUGE


To display a different individual gauge, select a page number or swipe the screen to display the next or
previous gauge.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 74 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

4.8.2 Control Panel


The control panel allows manual control of the generator set and its corresponding circuit breaker. The
control panel functions are inactive unless the generator set control is in Automatic mode and the system
transition type is in Manual mode, with no fault conditions.
Select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the Generator Summary screen to open the control
panel. A button is grayed out when it is inactive.

FIGURE 67. CONTROL PANEL


The control panel buttons have the following functions.

TABLE 8. CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Active Button Description


Select to start the generator set.

Select to stop the generator set.

Select to reset faults on the generator set.

Select to close the associated generator set


circuit breaker.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 75 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Active Button Description


Select to open the associated generator set
circuit breaker.

4.9 AC Metering Screen


The AC Metering screen displays digital and analog data for each meter in the system.
Select a meter from the drop-down menu to display its data.

FIGURE 68. AC METERING SCREEN


The minimum and maximum values are configured in the Setup screen.
If the reading value is outside of the minimum and maximum range:
• Minimum or maximum value is shown in red.
• Red needle points to 10 degrees off the range.
• Reading value flashes red.
Select an individual gauge to display it in a larger size.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 76 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 69. LARGE GAUGE


To display a different individual gauge, select a page number or swipe the screen to display the next or
previous gauge.
To reset the energy parameters associated with the selected meter:
1. Select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the screen to open the control panel.

FIGURE 70. CONTROL PANEL


2. Select the Reset kWh/kVARh button.

4.10 Trending Screen


The Trending screen allows a user to view the real time and historical data for all generator sets, meters,
and networked ATSs (if equipped).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 77 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 71. TRENDING SCREEN


The trending chart contains the date and time frame in the x-axis and the color coded minimum and
maximum parameter values in the y-axis. The date and time frame is adjusted through the scroll bar in the
x-axis or the control panel. When there is more than one parameter selected, each color on the y-axis
represents a device parameter. Parameters are selected in the control panel. Up to 8 parameters can be
selected at a time. The adjustable vertical blue line is used as a reading guide to compare parameters.
Parameter data for the Trending screen is logged for 90 days. Data that is older than 90 days is deleted.
Data is logged for 15 generator set parameters, 8 meter parameters, and 8 ATS parameters. Generator
set and meter parameters are updated when a parameter value changes. ATS parameters are updated
every minute. The following parameters are selectable to display on the trending screen.

TABLE 9. TRENDING CHART PARAMETERS

Generator Set Meter ATS


Average Voltage LL Average Voltage LL Average Voltage LL2
Average Voltage LN Average Voltage LN Average Voltage LN
Average Current Average Current Average Current3
Percent kW Total kW Total kW3
kW Total kVAR Total kVAR3
kVAR Total kVA Total kVA3
kVA Frequency Frequency
Frequency Power Factor Power Factor
Power Factor

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 78 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

Generator Set Meter ATS


Battery Voltage
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
Coolant Temperature
Engine RPM
Fuel Rate1
1 Dependent on the generator set model.
2 Not available with CCM card.
3 Dependent on the ATS load module.

The button is displayed when more than one parameter is selected. Select the button to display a
legend of parameter colors.

FIGURE 72. TRENDING SCREEN WITH LEGEND


Select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the screen to open the control panel.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 79 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 73. CONTROL PANEL

To print the trending chart currently displayed, select the button. The trending chart can be printed to a
PDF if the computer has a PDF creator or to a printer if printing has been set up.

To display real-time data on the trending chart, select the play button. When playing, the pause
button is displayed in place of the play button. Select it to freeze the data displayed on the trending chart.
Data continues to be logged in the background.
Start Time is the beginning date and time of the trend and End Time is the end date and time of the trend.
The times are set to the current chart settings when the pause button is selected. Times are displayed
only when the trend is paused. Select the button next to Start Time or End Time to edit the time.

4.10.1 Add Parameter


To add a generator set, meter, or ATS parameter:
1. Select the appropriate add parameter button on the control panel.

• Generator Set -

• Meter -

• ATS -
2. Select the device name from the drop-down list.
3. Select the parameter from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the minimum and maximum value of the parameter.
5. Close the parameter selection window to add the parameter to the trending table and chart.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 80 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

4.10.2 Save Trending Chart Data


To save trending chart data for one device with a preset date range to a USB drive:

1. Select the button on the control panel.


2. A window is displayed to enter the data extraction information.

FIGURE 74. DATA EXTRACTION WINDOW


3. Insert a USB drive into a USB port.
4. Select a device button.

• Generator Set -

• Meter -

• ATS -
5. Select the device name from the drop-down list.
6. Enter the date range.

7. Select the button to extract the data.


8. Close the displayed confirmation or failure message.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 to extract data for another device or correct any errors.

10. When finished, select the button to safely remove the USB drive without causing file corruption.
11. Remove the USB drive from the USB port.
A CSV and HDR file are created on the USB drive in the following name format:
• <Device Name>_<Start Date MMDDYYYY>_<End Date MMDDYYYY>.csv

A063J840 (Issue 1) 81 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

• <Device Name>_<Start Date MMDDYYYY>_<End Date MMDDYYYY>.hdr


The CSV file opens as a Microsoft Excel file and the HDR file opens in Notepad. The CSV file contains
the date and time, and the parameter values. The HDR file contains a list of parameter names that
correspond to parameter value columns in the CSV file. The figure below shows the 2 files and their
relationship. The value of the first parameter is in column C of the CSV file and the last parameter value is
in column Q.

FIGURE 75. SAVED FILES

4.10.3 Edit Trend Parameter


To edit the minimum and maximum parameter limits:

1. Select the button next to the parameter to edit parameter data in the control panel.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 82 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 76. PARAMETER EDIT WINDOW


2. Enter the minimum and maximum values.

NOTICE
The device and parameter can be changed if desired by selecting them from the drop-down
list.

3. Close the parameter selection window to save changes.

To remove a parameter, select the button next to the parameter to be removed in the control panel.

4.11 System Control Screens


The system control screens contain various settings for system control. The number of screens and type
of selections vary depending on the system. All of the information in the following screens is not applicable
to all systems.

4.11.1 System Settings


The system settings determine how the system is controlled.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 83 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 77. SYSTEM SETTINGS


Select the appropriate Control Selection radio button. The DMC determines whether system conditions
indicate that the control request is valid.

NOTICE
Only one control mode can be active at a time.

• Operator – System control sequences are manually controlled from any DMC HMI, including the
Web.
◦ If the system is operating in a Test or Extended Parallel System Mode, the System Mode is
maintained until it is changed.
◦ Operator can be selected at any time.
• Hardwired Inputs – Allows the system to enter Test with Load or Extended Parallel System mode
using customer inputs to the DMC to trigger the relevant mode.
◦ The current Transition Type and Loadbus Selection settings are used by the system. If the
current settings do not allow the system to be in Hardwired Inputs, the selection is ignored.
◦ Hardwired Inputs can only be selected when the System Mode is Off.
• Scheduler – Allows the scheduled events set up in the Scheduler screen to run.
◦ The current Transition Type and Loadbus Selection settings are used by the system.
◦ Scheduler can only be selected when the System Mode is Off.
If there is more than one Loadbus in the system, Test with Load and Extended Parallel System Mode
require a Loadbus to be selected. Select the appropriate Loadbus Selection checkboxes.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 84 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

When the Control Selection is Hardwired Inputs or Scheduler, the System Mode is automatically selected
by the system. If the proper conditions exist, select the appropriate System Mode radio button.
• Off – Returns the system to its normal standby operation.
• Test without Load – Parallels the generator set to the generator set bus without adding or
transferring loads to the generator sets.
• Extended Parallel – Parallels the utility source with the generator sets. The kW and kVAR settings in
the system control screens must be set up properly before starting. Only one loadbus can be
selected.
• Test with Load – Transfers the selected load bus(s) to the generator source.
Select the appropriate Transition Type radio button.
• Auto- Open Transition – Automatically performs open transition transfers and retransfers with a
Programmed Transition Delay.
• Auto- Soft Closed Transition – Automatically performs soft transition with load ramping for both
transfers and retransfers between live sources.
• Auto- Hard Closed Transition – Automatically performs a hard transition parallel with less than 100
msec of overlap.
• Manual – All automatic control operations are disabled and allows operator initiated control of the
DMC. The operator can request the DMC to open and close breakers, and start and parallel
generator sets. However, the DMC does not allow full operator control of the system.

4.11.2 kW Load Settings


Set up the kW load settings that are used for Extended Parallel.
When the generator set bus setpoint is set to a fixed value, the utility handles the variation in the loads
(base load). When the utility bus kW setpoint is set to a fixed value, the generator sets handle the
variation in the loads until the load on the generator sets exceed their capacity.

TABLE 10. KW CONTROL

Load Control Type Description


Generator Bus % Level The available generator sets run at the entered percentage of their rated
(Base Load) outputs. If a generator set is not available, the remaining generator sets do
not provide more power to compensate. The utility provides the rest of the
power required by the loads. See Figure 78.
Generator Bus kW The available generator sets provide the entered amount of real power. If a
(Base Load) generator set is not available, the remaining generator sets provide more
power to compensate as long as there is enough capacity. The utility
provides the rest of the power required by the loads. See Figure 78.
Generator Bus kW with Utility Constraint The generator sets provide the entered amount of real power as long as
(Base Load) the utility provides a minimum amount of real power. If the utility starts
providing less power than the minimum amount entered (Utility Bus kW
Constraint Level), the amount of power provided by the generator sets is
reduced. A positive or 0 minimum amount prevents the generator sets from
providing power to the utility (see Figure 79). A negative minimum amount
allows the generator sets to export power to the utility if the load is less
than the amount of real power provided by the generator sets (see Figure
80).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 85 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Load Control Type Description


Utility Bus kW The utility provides the entered amount of real power. The generator sets
(Peak Shave) provide the rest of the power required by the loads. See Figure 81.

No. Description No. Description


kW Real Power G Generator Set Output
t Time L Load

FIGURE 78. GENERATOR BUS % LEVEL AND GENERATOR BUS KW

No. Description No. Description


kW Real Power G Generator Set Output
t Time L Load

FIGURE 79. GENERATOR BUS KW WITH UTILITY CONSTRAINT (POSITIVE)

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 86 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

No. Description No. Description


kW Real Power G Generator Set Output
t Time L Load

FIGURE 80. GENERATOR BUS KW WITH UTILITY CONSTRAINT (NEGATIVE)

No. Description No. Description


kW Real Power G Generator Set Output
t Time L Load

FIGURE 81. UTILITY BUS KW

A063J840 (Issue 1) 87 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 82. KW LOAD SETTINGS


Select the appropriate kW Load Control Type radio button.

The pencil symbol indicates the kw Control Setpoint that corresponds with the selected control type.
Select the text box to edit the value.

To view the settings for the next bus, select the button. To view settings for a previous bus, select the
button.
To display a different System Control screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.11.3 kVAR Load Settings


Set up the kVAR load settings that are used for Extended Parallel.
The kVAR control settings, in either kVAR or power factor, determine how much of the reactive load is
carried by each source. It is independent of kW control. For example, generator sets can run in base load
while maintaining the power factor of the utility to avoid penalties due to low power factor.

TABLE 11. KVAR CONTROL

Load Control Type Description


None The DMC does nothing. Each generator set controls kVAR based on their
own settings.
Generator Bus % Level The available generator sets run at the entered percentage of their rated
outputs.
Generator Bus Power Factor The DMC adjusts the kVAR output of the generator sets to maintain the
entered generator set power factor. The utility makes up the difference
depending on the load power factor.
Generator Bus kVAR The DMC drives the kVAR control output to achieve the kVAR setpoint at
the Gen Main. The utility makes up the difference depending on the load
power factor.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 88 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

Load Control Type Description


Utility Bus kVAR The DMC drives the kVAR control output on the generator sets to achieve
the kVAR setpoint at the Utility Main.
Utility Bus Power Factor The DMC drives the kVAR control output on the generator sets to achieve
the power factor setpoint at the Utility Main.

FIGURE 83. KVAR LOAD SETTINGS


Select the appropriate kVAR Load Control Type radio button.

The pencil symbol indicates the kVAR Control Setpoint that corresponds with the selected control type.
Select the text box to edit the value.

To view the settings for the next bus, select the button. To view settings for a previous bus, select the
button.
To display a different System Control screen, select a page number on the top of the screen or swipe the
screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.12 Load Control Screen


The Load Control screen allows load priorities to be set up, monitoring of system load add and shed
levels, and manual control of loads. Each load bus in the system has an associated load control screen.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 89 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 84. LOAD CONTROL SCREEN


The Generator Bus Load Capacity table contains the generator set bus true Load, Capacity, and Spare
values for Power and Current. The table provides the information needed to determine if loads need to be
added or removed.
Load Level Assignment displays the load add and shed levels for each load bus.

NOTICE
Load add and shed levels can only be edited when the load bus is not connected to the
generator sets.

If there are more than 8 loads on the bus, select the button to view more loads. Select the button
to view previous loads. Enter the add or shed level. The following entries are invalid:
• Add or shed level out of range
• Add level greater than 1 and Shed level is 0
• Shed level is greater than 0 when Add level is 0
Add Level provides manual control of add levels. Load add connects loads based on load add levels, not
individual loads.
• The Status symbol shows the status of the add level.

◦ Loads are not added.

◦ Loads are added.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 90 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

• When the button is active, select to connect the loads for the add level. The button is active
when:
◦ Add level has not been added.
◦ Bus is not overloaded.
◦ Generator sets are powering the load.
◦ System is in Auto.
Shed level provides manual control of shed levels. Load shed removes or restores load shed levels based
on load shed levels, not individual loads.
• The Status symbol shows the status of the shed level.

◦ Loads are in normal condition.

◦ Loads are shed.

• When the button is active, select to remove the loads for the shed level. The button is active
when:
◦ Shed level has not been shed.
◦ Any load on the shed level has been added.
◦ Generator sets are powering the load.
◦ System is in Auto.

• When the button is active, select to reconnect the loads for the shed level. The button is active
when:
◦ Shed level has been shed.
◦ Bus overload alarm has been reset.
◦ Generator sets are powering the load.
◦ System is in Auto.
To display the Load Control screen for another load bus, select a page number on the top of the screen or
swipe the screen to display the next or previous screen.

4.13 Load Bank Screen


The Load Bank screen provides digital and graphical displays of critical operating parameters for each
generator set and the load bank breaker.
Select a generator set from the drop-down menu to display its data.
The generator set symbol contains information about the status of the generator set and its breaker. See
Section 4.7.1 on page 63 and Section 4.7.2 on page 65 for more information. If there is a switch position
symbol, see Section 4.7.3 on page 67.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 91 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 85. LOAD BANK SCREEN


The Load Bank symbol contains the load side bus status of the load bank breaker.

No. Description No. Description


1 Connected to Dead Bus (green resistor symbol) 3 Connected to Unknown Bus State (gray resistor
symbol)
2 Connected to Live Bus (red resistor symbol)

FIGURE 86. LOAD BANK STATUS


Select the Load Bank Test Enable checkbox to enable load bank manual control. Enable is only available
when the Load Bank is selected for Control Mode Switch on the Load Bank Settings Setup screen.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 92 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

To manually control the generator set, its corresponding circuit breaker, and the load bank breaker, select
the left arrow side bar on the right side of the screen to open the control panel. The control panel functions
are inactive when the system is not in Load Bank mode under normal conditions. A button is grayed out
when it is inactive.

FIGURE 87. LOAD BANK CONTROL PANEL


The control panel buttons have the following functions.

TABLE 12. CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Active Button Description


Select to start the generator set.

Select to stop the generator set.

Select to reset faults on the generator set.

Select to close the associated generator set


circuit breaker.

Select to open the associated generator set


circuit breaker.

Select to close the load bank breaker.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 93 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Active Button Description


Select to open the load bank breaker.

4.14 Load Demand Screen


The Load Demand screen provides the capability to enable load demand, and set up load demand
settings and sequence.

FIGURE 88. LOAD DEMAND SCREEN


Select the Load Demand Enable checkbox to enable load demand.
If necessary, select the radio button to use Percent or Absolute kW to determine the thresholds for starting
and stopping the generator sets. The default unit is Percent.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 94 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

TABLE 13. LOAD DEMAND CONTROL METHODS

Method Use Description


Percent Used to limit the maximum Controls the number of generator sets using the operating
loading on generator sets. percentage of the generator sets. When the load increases, a new
generator set starts when the operating percentage reaches the
entered Restart %kW set point. When the load falls, the DMC
calculates the generator set operating percentage that will be
carried by the system when the lowest priority running generator
set is shut down. A generator set with an operating percentage
less than the entered Shutdown %kW set point is shut down.
Absolute kW Used to manage fuel Controls the number of generator sets using the reserve online
consumption particularly when capacity. Requires knowledge of facility load sizes. The next
the system has a large number generator set starts when the reserve capacity is less than the
of generator sets. entered set point. A generator set is stopped when the remaining
reserve capacity of the system is less than a set point.

Enter the appropriate threshold values to be used for determining the load demand sequence. Enter any
time delays necessary for the load demand sequence.

TABLE 14. LOAD DEMAND SETPOINTS

Setpoint Description
Shutdown %kW Percentage of the load that will be carried by the remaining generator sets once a generator
(Percent) set is shut down by load demand. The actual load on the generator set is less than this
value prior to a generator shutdown. This value must be at least 5 points smaller than
Restart %kW.
Restart %kW Percentage of online load with respect to the online generator capacity that must be
(Percent) exceeded to restart the next generator set in the load demand sequence.

Initial Delay Time that the DMC waits after load demand is enabled and all conditions for load demand
have been met before load demand becomes active. After load demand is enabled and all
conditions for load demand have been met, the DMC waits for the Initial Delay (1–60) time
before activating load demand.
Shutdown Delay Time the system waits before shutting down a generator set if the facility load is sufficiently
low. Used to place the appropriate number of generator sets in load demand stop for the
load required by the generator set bus. When load demand is enabled, the system
calculates the generator sets that may be shut down. If more than one generator set can be
shut down, the delays for each generator set begin timing 5 seconds apart.
Restart Delay Time required for the generator set bus to be at or greater than the restart capacity.
Prevents a generator set from restarting unnecessarily due to load transients.
Run Hour Differential Minimum difference of run hours between the generator sets for the Run Hours load
(Run Hours) demand sequence.
Spare Capacity Pick Up The system has a remote input contact that allows load demand to respond to large load
steps. When the input is on, load demand adds the this value to the actual load and starts
enough generator sets to make sure that the generator sets can supply the additional load.
Useful for facilities that have large loads that are periodically added to the system.

Select the appropriate radio button that determines how the generator sets are shutdown and restarted.
The load sequence is shown in the boxes below the radio buttons.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 95 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

TABLE 15. LOAD DEMAND SEQUENCE METHOD

Method Description
User Defined Generator sets shut down and restart in a user defined fixed order as the load increases
and decreases.
Run Hours The load demand sequence is based on the engine run hours of the generator sets.
Generator sets with lower run hours have a higher priority to run. The sequence is
reordered when the difference between the hours is greater than the Run Hour Differential
on the Load Demand screen.
Auto Rotate Rotates the load demand shutdown sequence every time all of the generator sets go offline.
The lowest priority generator set becomes the lead unit. The lead unit will become the B
unit, the B unit becomes the C unit, etc. For example, the sequence 1, 2, 3, 4 changes to 4,
1, 2, 3 when the generators are shut down. The next sequence will be 3, 4, 1, 2.

The Load Demand Status displays the current status of the load demand system. If load demand has not
been activated, a dash is displayed for the value. When load demand is activated, the values are
displayed; however the following values will display a dash in certain conditions.
• If all available generator sets are running, a dash is displayed for Next Generator to Start and
Restart kW.
• If there are no more generator sets to shut down, a dash is displayed for Next Generator to Stop and
Shutdown kW.

Select the button to display load demand information. A dash is displayed when the generator set
cannot be shut down by load demand. A dash and the indicator is displayed when the generator set is
not available and is not considered in load demand calculations.

FIGURE 89. LOAD DEMAND STATUS

4.15 Event Log Screen


The Event Log screen provides a list of all of the events that have occurred in the past 365 days.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 96 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 90. EVENT LOG SCREEN


An arrow in the column heading indicates that the log can be sorted by the data in the column in
ascending or descending order.
By default, the list is filtered to display events for the past 7 days. A maximum of 1024 events are
displayed at a time. The control panel provides the capability to filter by date and event type. The filtered
data can also be printed and the log can be deleted. Select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the
screen to open the control panel.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 97 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 91. CONTROL PANEL


Enter the From and To date for filtering or printing events.

TABLE 16. CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Active Button Description


Select to filter events to display all system events
that occurred within the specified date range.

Select to filter events to display all generator set


events that occurred within the specified date
range.
Select to filter events to display all load events
that occurred within the specified date range.

Select to remove the filtering of events to display


all events that occurred within the specified date
range.
Select to print the filtered events within the
specified date range.

Select to delete the event log. The event log


cannot be retrieved after being deleted.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 98 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

4.16 Alarm History Screen


The Alarm History screen provides a list of all of the alarms that have occurred in the past 365 days. The
alarm color indicates its status.
• Red - Active alarm that has not been acknowledged.
• Green - Active alarm that has been acknowledged.
• Blue - Inactive alarm that has not been acknowledged.

FIGURE 92. ALARM HISTORY SCREEN


An arrow in the column heading indicates that the history can be sorted by the data in the column in
ascending or descending order.
By default, the list is filtered to display events for the past 7 days. A maximum of 1024 alarms are
displayed at a time. The control panel provides the capability to filter by date. The filtered data can be
printed and the entire alarm history can be deleted. Select the left arrow side bar on the right side of the
screen to open the control panel.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 99 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 93. CONTROL PANEL


Enter the From and To date for filtering or printing alarms.

TABLE 17. CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

Active Button Description


Select to print the filtered events within the
specified date range.

Select to delete the entire alarm history. The


history cannot be retrieved after being deleted.

4.17 Scheduler Screen


The Scheduler screen provides the capability to program up to 12 schedules to run the generator sets and
6 exceptions to those schedules. The Scheduler Control Selection radio button on the System Control
screen needs to be selected for the schedules and exceptions to run.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 100 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 94. SCHEDULER SCREEN

Select the button to view more exceptions or schedules. Select the button to view previous
exceptions or schedules.

To enter or edit an exception, select the button associated with a blank or existing exception.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 101 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

FIGURE 95. SCHEDULE EXCEPTION EDIT


1. Select the Enable checkbox to enable or disable the exception.
2. Select the month radio button.
3. Select the Day of the exception from the calendar container.
4. Select the Repeat radio button to run the exception Once or Yearly.
5. Enter the Start Time and Duration of the exception (maximum 31 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes).

6. Select the button to close the window.

To enter or edit a schedule, select the button associated with a blank or existing system schedule.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 102 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 96. SYSTEM SCHEDULE EDIT


1. Select the Enable checkbox to enable or disable the schedule.
2. Select the Repeat radio button.
3. Select the Day radio button.
4. Enter the Start Time and Duration (maximum 31 days, 23 hours, 59 minutes).
5. Select the Mode radio button.

6. Select the button to close the window.

4.18 Generator Report Screen


The Generator Report screen is used to create, view, email, and extract generator set reports. Reports
contain the following operational parameters of each generator set.
• Total kW
• % kW
• Oil Pressure
• Coolant Temperature
• Battery Voltage (V)
• Total kVAR
• Frequency (Hz)
• Current L1 (Amp)

A063J840 (Issue 1) 103 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

• Current L2 (Amp)
• Current L3 (Amp)
• Voltage L1-L2 (V)
• Voltage L2-L3 (V)
• Voltage L3-L1 (V)
Reports are automatically generated when reports are enabled. An individual report is finalized when the
generator set stops or is running below the minimum load.

FIGURE 97. GENERATOR REPORT SCREEN


To enable all reports, select the Enable checkbox.
If desired, enter a Sample Rate (default is 5 minutes).
If desired, enter a Minimum Load (range is 0–100%, default is 30%).
To view a report for a generator set:
1. Select a generator set from the drop-down list.

2. Select the button to view all of the generated reports for the selected generator set.
3. Select the report file name to view.
4. Select the OK button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 104 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 98. GENERATOR REPORT EXAMPLE

5. To print the report, select the button.

6. To close the report, select the button.


To email a report for a generator set:
1. Select a generator set from the drop-down list.

2. Select the button to view all of the generated reports for the selected generator set.
3. Select the report file name to email.
4. Select the OK button.
If desired, enter a Report Note. A note has to be entered prior to report creation.
To extract all reports and associated files to a USB drive:
1. Insert a USB drive into the USB port.

2. Select the button to extract the data.


3. Close the displayed confirmation message.

4. When finished, select the button to safely remove the USB drive without causing file corruption.
5. Remove the USB drive from the USB port.

NOTICE
All the associated report files need to be stored in the same folder on the USB drive. To view a
report from the USB drive, double click on the HTML file.

To delete all reports, select the button. Reports cannot be retrieved after being deleted.
Report Status shows the generator set name, status, load, and runtime for each report.

TABLE 18. GENERATOR SET STATUS INDICATORS

Indicator Description
Start Pending

Warm-up at Idle

A063J840 (Issue 1) 105 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

Indicator Description
Running

Cooldown at Rated

Cooldown at Idle

Warning or Derate

Shutdown with Cooldown or Shutdown

Load Demand Stop

4.19 Run Report Screen


The Run Report screen is used to create, view, email, and extract a report of critical system events. The
report contains the following information:
• Normal source interruption
• Normal source restore
• System Mode
• State of each generator set
• ATS transfers
• Circuit breaker operation
Reports are generated automatically when the system is operating and reports are enabled. A report is
finalized when all generators are shut down due to a power source recovery or System Mode is Off, or if
the settings report is disabled.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 106 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 4. Human-Machine Interface

FIGURE 99. RUN REPORT SCREEN


To enable report generation, select the Enable checkbox.
If desired, enter a report note. A note has to be entered prior to report creation.
To view a report for a specific month and year:
1. Enter the desired month/year.

2. Select the button to view all of the generated reports for the entered month and year.
3. Select the report file name to view.
4. Select the OK button.

FIGURE 100. RUN REPORT EXAMPLE

5. To print the report, select the button.

6. To close the report, select the button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 107 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


4. Human-Machine Interface 7-2019

To email a report for a specific month and year:


1. Enter the desired month/year.

2. Select the button to view all of the generated reports for the entered month and year.
3. Select the report file name to email.
4. Select the OK button.
To view reports for all years:

1. Select the button.


2. Select the report file name to view.
3. Select the OK button.
To extract all reports and associated files to a USB drive:
1. Insert a USB drive into the USB port.

2. Select the button to extract the data.


3. Close the displayed confirmation message.

4. When finished, select the button to safely remove the USB drive without causing file corruption.
5. Remove the USB drive from the USB port.

NOTICE
All the associated report files need to be stored in the same folder on the USB drive. To view a
report from the USB drive, double click on the HTML file.

To delete all reports, select the button. Reports cannot be retrieved after being deleted.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 108 A063J840 (Issue 1)


5 System Components
5.1 PLC M580
The PLC consists of a processor, DC power supply, and Ethernet communications module.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 109 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

No. Name Description


1 LED Display Used to diagnose the M580 Hot Standby system.
2 Mini USB Port Used for module configuration via PC running Unity Pro.
3 Service Provides access to other devices to monitor or communicate with the M580 CPU.
Ethernet Port
4 Device Connects the CPU to the main ring in the Ethernet daisy-chain ring.
Network Dual
Port
5 ACT LED Illuminates green or blinks when data is being transmitted and received for the Ethernet
connection.
6 LNK LED Illuminates green when a 100 Mbps link is established.
Illuminates yellow when a 10 Mbps link is established.
7 Hsby Link SFP socket for fiber-optic Hot Standby link connection.
8 Hsby Diag LED Illuminates green when the port is communicating with the remote Programmable Automation
Controller (PAC).
Blinks green when the port is configured and operational but there is no Hot Standby link.
9 SD Memory Not used.
Card Slot

FIGURE 101. M580 PROCESSOR

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 110 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

Name Description
RUN Illuminates green when the CPU is in Run state.
ERR Illuminates red when the system has detected an error.
I/O Illuminates red when the system has detected an error in one or more I/O modules.
DL (download) Blinks green when a firmware update is in progress.
REMOTE RUN Illuminates green when the remote PAC is in Run state.
Blinks green when the PAC is in Stop state.
Off when the local PAC cannot read the state of the remote PAC.
BACKUP Illuminates red when the memory card or CPU flash memory is missing or inoperable. The SD
memory card is not used.
ETH MS MOD Status - Illuminates green/red to indicate Ethernet port configuration status.
With the detection of a recoverable error, the LED can be green or red and on or off.
ETH NS NET Status - Illuminates green/red to indicate Ethernet port connection status.
A Illuminates green when the rotary switch on the back of the M580 is set to A and the remote CPU
rotary switch is set to B.
Blinks green when the B LED on the LED display is off or blinking green.
Off indicates that the local CPU rotary switch is not set to A or Clear.
B Illuminates green when the rotary switch on the back of the M580 is set to B and the remote CPU
rotary switch is set to A.
Blinks green when the A LED on the LED display is off or blinking green.
Off indicates that the local CPU rotary switch is not set to B or Clear.
PRIM Illuminates green to indicate the PAC is primary but the remote PAC is not in standby state.
Blinks green when the local PAC is in wait state (the STBY LED is also blinking).
CPU is in wait state when the CPU is in RUN mode and both PRIM and STBY LEDs are off.
If both CPUs are in RUN mode and one CPU is primary and the other is in wait state, the primary
CPU PRIM LED is illuminated and STBY LED is blinking, and the wait state CPU PRIM LED is off
and the STBY LED is blinking.
STBY Illuminates green to indicate the PAC is in standby state.
Blinks green when the local PAC is primary but the remote PAC is not in standby state or the local
PAC is in wait state (the PRIM LED is also blinking).
In wait state, the CPU is in RUN mode and both PRIM and STBY LEDs are blinking.
If a CPU is primary and the other is in wait state, primary PRIM LED is illuminated and STBY LED is
blinking, and the wait state PRIM LED is off and the STBY LED is blinking.
FORCED I/O Illuminates red when the I/O is manually set or reset.

FIGURE 102. LED DISPLAY

A063J840 (Issue 1) 111 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

The following table provides detailed diagnostic information according to the LEDs.

TABLE 19. LED DIAGNOSTICS

Condition CPU State RUN ERR I/O ETH MS ETH NS


Power On Autotest Blink Blink Red Blink Red Blink Blink Green
Green Green
Not Configured NOCONF Off Blink Red Off Blink N/A
Green
Configured Stop Blink Off Red: Error Green Green: Connection
Green Off: No Blink Green: Valid IP
Error Address, no connection
RUN Green Off Green
Off: Invalid IP Address
Recoverable Detected HALT Blink Blink Red N/A Green Blink Red
Error Green At least one exclusive owner
CIP connection (originator is
Ethernet Communications
Module) is timed out.
Duplicate IP Address N/A N/A N/A N/A Blink Red Red
Unrecoverable N/A Off Red Off Red N/A
Detected Error

5.1.1 DC Power Supply

No. Name Description


1 OK LED Illuminates green when the rack voltages are present and connected.
2 Reset Button Initializes the processor and forces the I/O modules to state 0.

FIGURE 103. DC POWER SUPPLY

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 112 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

5.1.2 Ethernet Communications Module

No. Name Description


1 MS LED Illuminates green when the module is operating normally. Blinks green when the module has
(Module not been configured.
Status) Illuminates red when the module has detected a non-recoverable error. Blinks red when the
module has detected a recoverable event.
2 RUN LED Illuminates green when the module is configured. Blinks green when the module is in power-up
test or in operating system update.
3 ERR LED Illuminates red when an error other than X Bus communication has been detected.
Blinks red when module is not configured or an X Bus communication error has been detected.
4 NS LED Illuminates green when the module has established at least one CIP connection (originator is
(Network the Ethernet Communications Module. Blinks green when the module has an IP address but
Status) there is no CIP connection.
Illuminates red when the module has a duplicate IP address but there is no CIP connection.
Blinks red when at least one exclusive owner CIP connection (target is the Ethernet
Communications Module) is timed out.
5 SERVICE Port ETH 1 RJ45 Ethernet connector for service.
6 DEVICE ETH 2 and ETH 3 RJ45 Ethernet network ports provide Ethernet communications (10/100
NETWORK Mbps), connections for distributed device communications, and cable redundancy through a
DUAL PORT daisy chain loop architecture.
7 LNK LED Illuminates yellow when a 10 Mbps link has been detected.
(Link) Illuminates green when a 100 Mbps link has been detected.
8 ACT LED Illuminates green when a link has been detected but there is no activity.
(Activity) Blinks green to indicate there is transmit or receive activity.

FIGURE 104. ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS MODULE

A063J840 (Issue 1) 113 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

5.2 I/O Island


The I/O island consists of a DC power supply, remote I/O drop, discrete DC input module, and a discrete
relay output module.

5.2.1 DC Power Supply

No. Name Description


1 OK LED Illuminates green when the rack voltages are present and connected.
2 Reset Button Initializes the processor and forces the I/O modules to state 0.

FIGURE 105. DC POWER SUPPLY

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 114 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

5.2.2 Remote I/O Drop

No. Name Description


1 LED Display See figure below.
2 Rotary Used to set the location of the Ethernet remote I/O drop on the network before applying power
Switches to the module and before downloading the application.
3 SERVICE Port Used for diagnosis of the Ethernet device network ports and provides access to external tools
(ETH 1) and devices.
4 DEVICE Copper port provides connections for remote I/O communications and cable redundancy.
NETWORK
Ports (ETH 2
and ETH 3)
5 LINK LED Illuminates green when a 100 Mbps link is detected.
Illuminates yellow when a 10 Mbps link is detected.
Off when no link is detected.
6 ACT LED Flashes green when the Ethernet link is transmitting or receiving.
Off when no Ethernet link is inactive.

FIGURE 106. REMOTE I/O DROP

A063J840 (Issue 1) 115 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

Run I/O MS NS
Condition Description
Green Red Green Red Green Red
Power-up Order of LEDs blinking 1 2 3 4 5 6
Sequence
Not configured IP address not valid — — flash off off off
Valid IP address/invalid off off flash off flash off
configuration
Configured No external error detected flash off — — flash off
External error detected flash on — — flash off
I/O data STOP flash (Note 1) on off on off
communication
established RUN on (Note 2) on off on off

Detected error Recoverable error — — off flash — —


states
Non-recoverable error flash on off on — —
Duplicate IP address — — — — off on
OS firmware update flash off off on off on
Note 1 (STOP state):
• on: An input or output is a detected error that originates in a module or channel configuration, or a channel
configuration error is detected.
• off: Operations are normal.
Note 2 (RUN state):
• on: External error is detected.
• off: External error is not detected.

FIGURE 107. LED DISPLAY

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 116 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

5.2.3 Discrete DC Input

No. Name Description


1 RUN LED Illuminates green when the module is operating.
2 ERR LED Illuminates red when an internal fault or a fault between the module and the rest of the
configuration has been detected.
3 I/O LED Illuminates red when an external fault has been detected.
4 DL LED Illuminates green when the firmware has been downloaded.
5 I0 and I1 LEDs Illuminates green to indicate channel capture input voltage is present.
6 Q1, Q2, and Illuminates green to indicate channel reflex output voltage is present.
Q3 LEDs
7 S0, S1, and S2 Illuminates green to indicate channel input voltage is present.
LEDs

FIGURE 108. DISCRETE DC INPUT


The following table provides diagnostics of the module status according to the LEDs.

TABLE 20. MODULE STATUS DIAGNOSTICS

Module Status RUN ERR I/O DL Sx Qx Ix


Module is inoperative. Off On Off
Module is not configured or is Flash
configuring the channels. Off Off Off Off Off
Slowly
Module has lost communication Flash
with CPU. On
Slowly
Field power supply inoperative. Flash Flash Flash
On Off On Off
Slowly Slowly Slowly

A063J840 (Issue 1) 117 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

Module Status RUN ERR I/O DL Sx Qx Ix


Firmware being downloaded. Flash Flash
Off Off
Slowly Slowly
Sx has a detected line error. Flash
On Off On Off
Fast
Qx has a short circuit. Flash
On Off On Off
Fast
Absolute SSI Encoder mode is
On Off Off Off All On
selected and no error detected.

5.2.4 Discrete Relay Output

No. Name Description


1 RUN LED Illuminates green when the module is operating normally.
2 ERR LED Illuminates red when an internal fault has been detected.
3 I/O LED Illuminates red when an external fault has been detected.
4 Channel Status Illuminates when a voltage is present.
LEDs

FIGURE 109. DISCRETE RELAY OUTPUT


The following table provides diagnostics of the module status according to the LEDs.

TABLE 21. MODULE STATUS DIAGNOSTICS

Module Status RUN ERR I/O


Normal operation. On Off Off
Module analysis is needed
Off On Off
(internal).

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 118 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

Module Status RUN ERR I/O


Module communication
On Flash Off
interruption (internal).
Overload, short circuit,
sensor/pre-actuator voltage On Off On
error (external)
Self test of the module at
Flash Flash Flash
startup.
Module not configured. Off Flash Off
No power to module. Off Off Off

A063J840 (Issue 1) 119 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

5.3 UPS

No. Name Description


1 Potentiometer Used to set the buffer time setting and change the PC mode.
2 Alarm LED Illuminates red to indicate an alarm.
In Mains Mode, indicates that there is a problem with the batteries.
In Battery Mode, indicates that the batteries are almost completely discharged.
3 Battery Mode Illuminates yellow when mains power is not available and the UPS is supplied by the batteries.
LED
4 Mains Mode Illuminates green when mains power is being supplied.
LED
5 Stick Data Port Used for data linking to the PC or the user of a memory stick.
6 Stick UPS Used to put the UPS in service mode.
Buttons
7 Battery Graph Displays the current charging state of the batteries. Lower bar in graph flashes red when the
LED Alarm LED is illuminated in Mains Mode.

FIGURE 110. UPS

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 120 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 5. System Components

5.4 UPS Power Supply

No. Name Description


1 Boost LED Illuminates green during boost operation.
2 DC OK LED Illuminates green during normal operation of the power supply.
3 18-29.5 V Used to set the output voltage.
Potentiometer

FIGURE 111. UPS POWER SUPPLY

A063J840 (Issue 1) 121 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


5. System Components 7-2019

5.5 FL Comserver

No. Name Description


1 Ethernet Flashes yellow when data is being transmitted or received.
Activity LED
2 Ethernet Port Ethernet RJ45 connection.
3 Ethernet Link Illuminates green when communication is established.
LED
4 RD LED Illuminates green when data is being received.
5 TD LED Illuminates yellow when data is being transmitted.
6 100 LED Illuminates green when data is being transmitted at 100 Mbps.
7 FD LED Illuminates green when data is being transmitted in full duplex mode.
8 Error LED Illuminates red when an error has occurred.
9 UL LED Illuminates green when power is being supplied.

FIGURE 112. FL COMSERVER

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 122 A063J840 (Issue 1)


6 Service Procedures
6.1 Service Tools
Software:
• Unity Loader
• Unity 8.1 or higher
• Indusoft WebStudio 7.1 SP3 Patch 4
Additional Tools:
• CAT5E RJ45 Ethernet Patch Cable
• USB Type-A Male to Male Cable
• Portable Wireless USB Keyboard/Mouse
• 2 mm Flathead Screwdriver
• Magnetic Flashlight

6.2 HMI Procedures


6.2.1 Disable Enhanced Write Filter
The DMC C:\ drive is protected to prevent unintentional changes to the drive. This protection needs to be
disabled before performing procedures that make changes to the drive.
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the computer to the Ethernet service port.
2. Connect a USB keyboard to the USB service port.
3. Select the Windows key.
4. Select Start > Programs > Advantech > AdvEWF.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 123 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 113. ADVANTECH EWF UTILITY


5. Select EWF Utility.

FIGURE 114. ADVANTECH EWF UTILITY


6. Select the EWF tab.
7. Select Disable.
8. When prompted for confirmation, select Yes.
9. If a "Failed Un registering Windows Class" message is displayed, select OK.
10. The PC reboots.

6.2.2 Enable Enhanced Write Filter


1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the computer to the Ethernet service port.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 124 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

2. Connect a USB keyboard to the USB service port.


3. Select the Windows key.
4. Select Start > Programs > Advantech > AdvEWF.

FIGURE 115. ADVANTECH EWF UTILITY


5. Select EWF Utility.

FIGURE 116. ADVANTECH EWF UTILITY


6. Select the EWF tab.
7. Select Enable.
8. When prompted for confirmation, select OK.
9. If a "Failed Un registering Windows Class" message is displayed, select OK.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 125 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

10. The PC reboots.

6.2.3 Configure IP Address


1. Perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
2. Open the Start menu and select Control Panel.
3. Select Network and Internet.
4. Select Network and Sharing Center.
5. Select Change adapter setting from the left window panel.
6. Right click on the appropriate network and select Properties.
7. Select the Network tab in the network properties window.
8. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
9. Select the Properties button.

FIGURE 117. INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 4 (TCP/IPV4) PROPERTIES


10. Select the Use the following IP address: radio button.
11. Enter the required IP address and Subnet mask.
12. Select OK.
13. Select OK on the network properties window.
14. Perform the Enable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.

6.2.4 Print Setup


The DMC can be connected to a network printer via the customer network connection. The printer must
be Windows 7 compatible and a printer driver must be installed.
To set up a printer in the HMI:
1. Perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 126 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

2. If a company user ID and password is required to print:


a. In the Control Panel, select Credential Manager.
b. Select Add a Windows credential.

c. Enter the Internet or network address (computer name).


d. Enter the required User name and Password.
e. Select OK.
3. Open the Control Panel.
4. Select Devices and Printers.
5. Select Add a printer.
6. In the Add Printer window, select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
7. Select Next.
8. If the desired printer is in the list, select the printer. If the desired printer isn't in the list or no printers
were found, select The printer that I want isn't listed.
9. Select Next.
10. Make sure that Select a shared printer by name is selected and enter the computer and printer
name.
Example: \\PGAXSUTIL01\PUSSHRVIC014
11. Select Next.
12. In the successfully added window, select Next.
13. Make sure the Set as the default printer is checked.
14. Select Finish.
15. Perform the Enable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.

6.2.5 Remote Web Access


The DMC has a dedicated Network Interface Card (NIC) that can be connected to a customer's network to
enable remote capabilities in the DMC. Connection to the DMC is via a 10/100BaseT Ethernet patch
cable.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 127 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

The DMC is supplied with a customer network adaptor set to obtain its IP address automatically from a
DHCP server. To set up Web browsing, it is necessary to have the IP address or the PC name set to a
known fixed value for Web clients to use. Coordination with the IT department of the customer is
necessary to determine what IP address or PC name is used.
1. Perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
2. Select the Windows Key.
3. On the Start bar, right click on the Network icon at the bottom right of the bar and select open
network sharing center.
4. Right click on Local Area Connection B Properties and select properties.

FIGURE 118. LOCAL AREA CONNECTION B PROPERTIES


5. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4).
6. Select the Properties button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 128 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 119. INTERNET PROTOCOL VERSION 4 (TCP/IPV4) PROPERTIES


7. Select the Use the following IP address: radio button.
8. Enter the required IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway.
9. If email functionality is required and a mail server needs to be specified:
a. Select the Use the following DNS server addresses: radio button.
b. Enter the required Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server addresses.
10. Select OK.
11. Select OK on the Local Area Connection B Properties window.
12. Perform the Enable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher and an installed plug-in are required for a Web client to remotely monitor
the DMC. The plug-in can be downloaded and installed directly from the DMC if the user has the rights to
do so on their PC. If the user does not have the required privileges to install software, the plug-in can be
installed by their IT administrators.
To install the plug-in:
1. Right click on ThinClientSetup.exe and select Run as administrator.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 129 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 120. INSTALLSHIELD WIZARD


2. Select the Next button.

FIGURE 121. CUSTOMER INFORMATION


3. Select the Next button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 130 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 122. CHOOSE DESTINATION LOCATION


4. Select the Next button.

FIGURE 123. SELECT FEATURES


5. Select the Next button.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 131 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 124. READY TO INSTALL THE PROGRAM


6. Select the Install button.

FIGURE 125. INSTALLSHIELD WIZARD COMPLETE


7. Select the Finish button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 132 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

To view the DMC8000 remotely:


1. With the DMC8000 and the remote client computer connected to the same network, open Internet
Explorer.
2. Enter the URL used to connect to the DMC (IP address or PC name assigned above).

6.2.6 Add Web Clients


The DMC can have 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 Web clients dependent on the number ordered. A serial
number is provided for licensing the product. Use the appropriate procedure based on the type of HMI.

6.2.6.1 Embedded View HMI (4k Tags or Less)


1. Perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
2. Connect the laptop to the DMCs local 192.168.0.x network.
3. Open Indusoft Web Studio and select the Connect button.

FIGURE 126. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - TARGET


4. Select Embedded License on the left side of the window.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 133 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 127. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - EMBEDDED LICENSE


5. Select the copy icon to the right of Site Code.
6. If this is being done during business hours, to license the product immediately:
a. Open a Web browser and enter www.indusoft.com.
b. Select the Online Click Here for Live Help button and select Licensing from the drop-down
list.
c. When a chat window opens, enter a description about adding additional Web clients to an
existing license, paste the copied Site Code, and enter the serial number.
d. Indusoft will send a new site key.
7. If after business hours, email the description, Site Code, and serial number to license@indusoft.com.
8. Indusoft will send a new site key. Copy and paste the new Site Key into the Remote Management
window and select Send.
9. The number of Web Thin Clients in the Remote Management window is updated to the number
requested.
10. Select OK.
11. Perform the Enable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.

6.2.6.2 Workstation HMI (16k Tags or More)


1. Perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
2. In HMI, close any Indusoft applications.

NOTICE
If the Studio Manager continues to run, remove Studio Manager process from Task
Manager.

3. Open Indusoft Registration utility.

NOTICE
An administrator login is required.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 134 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 128. PROTECTION MANAGER


4. Make sure that Softkey radio button is selected and select the Check button.

FIGURE 129. SOFTKEY SETTINGS


5. Select the Change License button.

FIGURE 130. CHANGE LICENSE - SOFTKEY


6. Select the copy icon to the right of Site Code.
7. If this is being done during business hours, to license the product immediately:
a. Open a Web browser and enter www.indusoft.com.
b. Select the Online Click Here for Live Help button and select Licensing from the drop-down
list.
c. When a chat window opens, enter a description about adding additional Web clients to an
existing license, paste the copied Site Code, and enter the serial number.
8. If after business hours, email the description, Site Code, and serial number to license@indusoft.com.
9. Indusoft will send a new site key. Copy and paste the new Site Key.
10. Select the Authorize button.
11. The number of Web Thin Clients in the Softkey Settings window is updated to the number
requested.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 135 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

12. Select Close to close the Softkey Setting window.


13. Select Close to close the Protection Manager window.
14. Perform the Enable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.

6.2.7 HMI Program Loading


The HMI program can be loaded using any computer running Windows OS and compatible with Indusoft
Web Studio (IWS).
1. If not downloading the same .APP file, perform the Disable Enhanced Write Filter procedure.
2. Perform the Configure IP Address procedure.
3. Delete any report folders saved in the Project Web folder.
4. Launch Indusoft Web Studio v7.1 software and select the IWS File menu icon (1).

FIGURE 131. INDUSOFT WINDOW


5. Select Open Project (2 and 3).

FIGURE 132. INDUSOFT OPEN


6. Browse to the desired project folder, select the .app file, and select the Open button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 136 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 133. INDUSOFT CONNECT


7. In the Home tab, select the Connect button in Remote Management.

FIGURE 134. REMOTE MANAGEMENT


8. Select Target on the left side of the screen.
9. Select the Target Station Host radio button, enter the host IP address, and select the Connect
button.
10. Log On To Target using the DMC technician user name and password.
11. Select Project on the left side of the screen.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 137 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 135. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - PROJECT

NOTICE
Make sure the Project Path Local is pointing to the current Project folder and the Project
Path Target is pointing to D:\DMC HMI\.

12. Select the Stop button. The Status field in the window indicates that the project was stopped.
13. If this is the first download, select the Download button; otherwise, select the Keep user files
checkbox and then the Download button.

NOTICE
If the Execution Environment warning is displayed, select the No button and check the
Target System to make sure that the project is under the correct license.

14. When the files are done transferring, select the Run button in the Remote Management - Project
window. The Status field in the window indicates that the project was started.
15. Select Target on the left side screen of the Remote Management window and select the Disconnect
button.
16. Select OK to close the Remote Management window.

6.2.8 Save HMI Program to Laptop


1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the laptop to the Ethernet service port.
2. Delete any files from the folder where the HMI program is going to be stored.
3. Launch Indusoft Web Studio v7.1 and select the Home tab.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 138 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 136. INDUSOFT MAIN SCREEN


4. Select Connect.

FIGURE 137. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - TARGET


5. Select the Host radio button and enter 192.168.0.100 (IP address of the HMI).
6. Select the Connect button. The Status field in the window indicates the connection to Indusoft Web
Studio.
7. Select Project on the left side of the screen.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 139 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 138. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - PROJECT


8. Select Target on the left side of the screen.
9. Select the Target Station Host radio button, enter the host IP address, and select the Connect
button.
10. Log On To Target using the DMC technician user name and password.
11. Select Project on the left side of the screen.

FIGURE 139. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - PROJECT


12. Select the Stop button to halt the execution of the HMI program. The Status field in the window
indicates that the project was stopped.
13. Select Import on the left side of the screen.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 140 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 140. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - IMPORT


14. Select browse [...] to the right of the To: field.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 141 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 141. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - IMPORT BROWSE TO


15. Select the folder where the HMI program will be stored or select the New Folder button to create a
folder.
16. Select the OK button.
17. Select browse [...] to the right of the From: field.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 142 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 142. REMOTE MANAGEMENT - IMPORT BROWSE FROM


18. Select the DMC_HMI folder and select the OK button.
19. Select the Get from Target button.
20. A warning is displayed saying that all files in the destination file will be removed. Select Yes.
21. When the files are done transferring, the Status field in the window indicates that the files were
received successfully.
22. Select Project on the left side of the screen.
23. Select the Run button. The Status field in the window indicates that the project was started.
24. Select Target on the left side screen and select the Disconnect button.
25. Select OK to close the Remote Management window.

6.3 PLC Procedures


6.3.1 PLC to PC File Transfer
To copy the PLC program to a PC:
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the PC to the Ethernet service port.
2. Make sure that the PC has an IP address of 192.168.0.50.
3. Launch Unity Loader.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 143 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 143. UNITY LOADER


4. Select Ethernet in the Connection Media drop-down menu.
5. Enter 192.168.0.200 in the Connection Address window.
6. Select the Connect button.
7. Select the PC <=> PLC button to change the direction of the transfer. The direction of the arrows in
the center of the screen change direction.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 144 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 144. UNITY LOADER PLC TO PC FILE TRANSFER


8. Select the drop-down menu under PC Project and select the appropriate file path for the PLC
program. The direction arrows in the center of the screen change to green.

NOTICE
The PLC Project and PLC Project Data Enable Transfer checkboxes are checked. Select the
checkbox to unselect a file for transfer.

9. Select the Transfer button. A transfer progress window is displayed during the transfer.

NOTICE
The transfer can take several minutes to complete.

10. When the transfer is complete, select the Close button on the transfer progress window.
11. Select the Disconnect button to terminate the connection between the PC and the PLC.
12. Select the Close button.

6.3.2 PC to PLC File Transfer


To copy the PLC program from a PC to the PLC:
1. Connect an Ethernet cable from the PC to the Ethernet service port.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 145 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

2. Make sure that the PC has an IP address of 192.168.0.50.


3. Launch Unity Loader.

FIGURE 145. UNITY LOADER


4. Select Ethernet in the Connection Media drop-down menu.
5. Enter 192.168.0.200 in the Connection Address window.
6. Select the Connect button.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 146 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 146. UNITY LOADER PC TO PLC FILE TRANSFER


7. Select the drop-down menu under PC Project and select the appropriate file path for the PLC
program. The direction arrows in the center of the screen change to green.
8. Select the Enable Transfer checkbox for PLC Project Data to unselect the project data for transfer.
9. Select the Stop PLC button.
10. Select the Transfer button. A transfer progress window is displayed during the transfer.

NOTICE
The transfer can take several minutes to complete.

11. When the transfer is complete, press the Start PLC button. Wait for approximately one minute for
the PLC to start. Observe the LEDs on the PLC to make sure it has started successfully.
12. Select the Stop PLC button.
13. Select the Enable Transfer checkbox for the PLC Project to unselect it.
14. Select the Enable Transfer checkbox for PLC Project Data to select the project data for transfer.
15. Select the Transfer button. A transfer progress window is displayed during the transfer.

NOTICE
The transfer can take several minutes to complete.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 147 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

16. When the transfer is complete, press the Start PLC button. Wait for approximately one minute for
the PLC to start. Observe the LEDs on the PLC to make sure it has started successfully.
17. Select the Close button on the transfer progress window.
18. Select the Disconnect button to terminate the connection between the PC and the PLC.
19. Select the Close button.

6.4 DMC Component Removal and Installation


6.4.1 Torque Requirements
TABLE 22. TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

Item Torque
Terminal Blocks 0.5–0.6 Nm (4.4–5.3 in-lb)
Shorting Blocks 1.5–1.8 Nm (13.3–15.9 in-lb)
Circuit Breaker 2.5 Nm (22 in-lb)
PLC M580 and I/O Island
1.5 Nm (13.3 in-lb)
Module Safety Screw(s)

NOTICE
Unless other specified, tighten screws and bolts hand tight.

6.4.2 PLC M580 and I/O Island Modules


To remove a module:
1. Disconnect any cables. Mark as required.
2. If removing the DC power supply, disconnect the 24 VDC plug.
3. If removing a discrete dc input or discrete relay output module, remove the terminal block.
4. If not already done, remove power by shutting off the breakers supplying power to the PLC or I/O
island.
5. Remove the safety screw (2 screws on PLC M580) on the top of the module.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 148 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

FIGURE 147. SCREW REMOVAL


6. Pull the top of the module back and remove the module.

FIGURE 148. MODULE REMOVAL


To install a new module:
1. Remove the protective cover from the pins on the rear of the module.
2. Position the locating pins on the bottom of the module into the corresponding slots of the rack.
3. Push the top of the module toward the top of the rack until the module is flush against the back of
the rack.
4. Tighten the safety screw(s). Torque to a maximum of 1.5 Nm (13.3 in-lb).
5. Connect any disconnected cables.
6. Switch on the breakers supplying power to the PLC or I/O island.

6.4.3 Circuit Breaker


To remove a circuit breaker:
1. Position the circuit breaker to the 0 - OFF position.
2. Disconnect the wire at the top of the circuit breaker.
3. Place a screw driver against the release latch on the bottom of the circuit breaker and remove the
circuit breaker.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 149 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

FIGURE 149. CIRCUIT BREAKER REMOVAL


To install a new circuit breaker:
1. Place the circuit breaker onto the rail from above and hook it to the rail.
2. Push the circuit breaker toward the rail and the bottom onto the rail.
3. Attach the wire to the top of the circuit breaker.
4. Position the switch to the 1- ON position.

6.4.4 Industrial PC
To remove The Industrial PC (IPC):
1. Position the circuit breaker that is providing power to the door to the 0 - OFF position.
2. Disconnect the VGA, 9-pin serial, DC power, and ground cables from the IPC.
3. Remove the 4 screws (2 on each side) attaching the IPC to the support bracket on the HMI and
remove the IPC.

FIGURE 150. IPC REMOVAL


To install a new IPC:
1. Place the IPC on the support bracket on the back of the HMI and insert the 4 screws.
2. Connect the cables that were removed from the IPC being replaced.
3. Position the circuit breaker that is providing power to the door to the 1- ON position.
4. Load the backup HMI software into the new IPC.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 150 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

6.4.5 UPS and UPS Power Supply


To remove the UPS or UPS power supply:
1. Remove power to the UPS or UPS power supply.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the module.
3. Place a screw driver against the release latch on the bottom of the module and slide it out of the
lower edge of the DIN rail.

FIGURE 151. UPS AND UPS POWER SUPPLY REMOVAL


To install a new UPS or UPS power supply:
1. Place the module on the DIN rail with the rail guides on the upper edge of the DIN rail.

FIGURE 152. RAIL GUIDES


2. Push the bottom of the module toward the DIN rail and snap it into place.
3. Connect the cables removed from the module.
4. Restore power to the module.

6.4.6 Batteries
If the batteries are being removed for storage, comply with the following storage conditions:
• Ambient temperature: –15 to 40 °C (5 to 104 °F), preferably below 30 °C (86 °F)
• Relative humidity: 25 to 85%
• Storage area free from vibration, dust, direct sunlight, and moisture.
During storage, batteries gradually lose their capacity due to self discharge. If the batteries are stored for
3 months or longer, periodically charge the battery at the intervals recommended below, depending on the
ambient temperature. Avoid storing batteries for more than 12 months.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 151 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

TABLE 23. REFRESH CHARGE INTERVALS

Storage Temperature Interval of Auxiliary Charge


Below 20 °C (68 °F) 9 months
20 to 30 °C (68 to 86 °F) 6 months
30 to 40 °C (86 to 104 °F) 3 months

The self discharge rate is dependent on the ambient storage temperature. The higher the ambient
temperature, the less battery residual capacity after storage. The self discharge rate almost doubles by
each 10 °C (18 °F) rise of storage temperature.
To remove the batteries:
1. Press both UPS buttons on the UPS for more than 6 seconds to enter Service mode (alarm LED
illuminated red).
2. Open the battery enclosure door.
3. Remove the fuses on the bottom left side of the enclosure.

FIGURE 153. BATTERY FUSES


4. Disconnect the battery cables.

FIGURE 154. BATTERY CABLES


5. Remove the batteries.
To install new/stored batteries:
1. Place the new batteries into the enclosure.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 152 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 6. Service Procedures

2. Connect the battery cables as shown above.


3. Insert the fuses.
4. Press the right UPS button for more than 6 seconds to register the batteries (bar graph flashes).
5. Press both UPS buttons on the UPS for more than 6 seconds to leave Service mode (red LED off).
6. Close the battery enclosure door.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 153 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


6. Service Procedures 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 154 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7 Troubleshooting
NOTICE
Many troubleshooting procedures or replacement of parts present hazards than can result in
equipment damage, severe personal injury, or death. Only trained and experienced service
personnel with knowledge of fuels, electricity, and machinery hazards should perform service
procedures.

Use the Interconnect Drawings in Appendix B on page 207 to troubleshoot external connections and the
Schematic Drawings in Appendix C on page 209 to troubleshoot internal connections. The drawings can
be used to determine what inputs and outputs, pilot relay, etc. correspond to the fault. Use the vendor
drawings for troubleshooting switchgear issues.
If the troubleshooting procedure for a fault does not solve the problem, collect as much data as possible
and refer to the Switchgear Product Support Plan (SP_00000022) available on QuickServe OnLine.

7.1 Alarms
The DMC continuously monitors the status of the system and generates alarms when something in the
system is not operating properly. Alarms are generated for failed devices within the system and incorrect
operator control of the system.

7.1.1 Breaker Alarms


Breaker alarms are alarms that indicate a problem with a breaker in the system. The breaker identifier is
displayed in front of the alarm text.

7.1.1.1 Aux Failure


Indicates that the PLC has detected 'A' and 'B' contacts for a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie
circuit breaker that do not have opposing signals.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the circuit breaker, terminal block, and I/O island input module.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 155 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 155. BREAKER CLOSE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Aux Contacts


WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard
Voltages and currents present an electrical shock hazard that can cause severe burns or
death.
Never operate the breaker using the pushbuttons on the front of the breaker unless
authorized to perform live electrical work.

1. Place the DMC in Manual mode and rack out the breaker to its test position.

NOTICE
If power to the facility would be interrupted, obtain permission from the facility or
customer to interrupt power to the site.

2. Perform a continuity check on the Aux 'A' and 'B' contacts of the breaker to get the current
state.

NOTICE
The Aux 'A' contact follows the position of the breaker and the Aux 'B' contact opposes
the position of the breaker, i.e., when the breaker is open, Aux 'A' should be open and
Aux 'B' should be closed.

3. Toggle the breaker position and verify that the corresponding outputs on the breaker change
appropriately.
4. If the Aux contacts do not change states or don't reflect the actual state of the breaker, contact
the breaker manufacturer for additional troubleshooting.

NOTICE
Only authorized personnel should perform service on breakers.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 156 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Toggle the breaker position and verify that the corresponding input on the input module is
changing appropriately.
2. Observe the LEDs for Aux 'A' and Aux 'B' on the input module.
3. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
4. If the LEDs do not turn on/off when the breaker position is toggled, verify that the input module
is receiving the signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the closure at
the terminal block does not match the circuit breaker, repair any wiring problems.
5. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
6. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

7.1.1.2 Fail to Close


Indicates that a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, Load, or Tie circuit breaker has been commanded to
close by the PLC, but the PLC has not received feedback that the breaker closed.
A close breaker circuit usually consists of several relay contacts and/or switches in a series that determine
when a breaker may be closed. All of these contacts in the line must be closed at the same time in order
for the close coil on the breaker to be exposed to control voltage. Some typical trip contacts include:
• Lockout relay
• Sync check contact from the protective relay
• Auto/Manual (or Local/Remote) switch
• Contacts for the DMC close commands
• Over current protection (fuses, circuit breakers)

NOTICE
The close signal coming from the DMC is pulsed and may cause control voltages to only be
visible for approximately 2 seconds.

FIGURE 156. TYPICAL EXAMPLE

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Troubleshoot any I/O Island Faults


Make sure that any I/O island related faults have been cleared.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 157 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

B. Check Connections
Check the connections in the close breaker circuit.

FIGURE 157. BREAKER CLOSE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

C. Check Breaker Status


Visually inspect the breaker.
1. If the breaker is locked out/tagged out, wait until maintenance on the system is complete and
the alarm is cleared.
2. If the breaker is closed, perform troubleshooting for the Breaker Aux Failure.

NOTICE
If the breaker is a generator set breaker, there is typically no 'B' contact feedback.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 158 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

D. Check Switchgear Control Power Over Current Protection


WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard
Voltages and currents present an electrical shock hazard that can cause severe burns or
death.
Where personal protective equipment in accordance with regional and local regulations.

1. If a fuse is pulled out, push the fuse back in.


2. If a fuse is blown, replace the fuse.

E. Check I/O Island Output Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Breaker Close signal on the output module.

NOTICE
When the DMC is attempting to close the breaker, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the Breaker Close LED does not illuminate, verify that the output module is not sending a
signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
a. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the output module.

F. Check Switchgear Interlocks


1. Check the control voltage at the pilot relay contact.
2. If there is no voltage at the contact, troubleshoot the switchgear interlocks. Refer to switchgear
schematic drawing in Appendix C on page 209.

G. Check Breaker Close Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Breaker Close when the DMC is
attempting to close the breaker.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the normally open (N.O.) relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay
cartridge.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 159 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

H. Check Circuit Breaker


WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard
Voltages and currents present an electrical shock hazard that can cause severe burns or
death.
Never operate the breaker using the pushbuttons on the front of the breaker unless
authorized to perform live electrical work.

If the spring charge indicator on the circuit breaker indicates the spring coil is discharged, check the
voltage at the spring charge motor contacts (MCH).
1. If there is no voltage, troubleshoot the motor charging supply. Refer to the switchgear vendor
drawing.
2. If there is voltage, perform basic troubleshooting of the circuit breaker. Refer to the
manufacturer's service manual and follow the manufacturer's recommendations.

NOTICE
Only authorized personnel should perform service on breakers.

7.1.1.3 Fail to Open


Indicates that a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, Load, or Tie breaker has been commanded to open by
the PLC, but the PLC has not received feedback that the breaker opened.
An open breaker circuit usually consists of several relay contacts and/or switches in parallel that
determine when a breaker may be opened. Any of these contacts in parallel may be closed in order for the
trip coil on the breaker to be exposed to control voltage. Some typical trip contacts include:
• Direct trip from the protective relay
• Lockout contacts from the #86 relay
• Manual control switch
• Trip contacts from the DMC
Many trip circuits also contain a Capacitive Trip Unit to help determine that a breaker is able to open when
there is a loss of control voltage.

FIGURE 158. TYPICAL EXAMPLE

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 160 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

A. Troubleshoot any I/O Island Faults


Make sure that any I/O island related faults have been cleared.

B. Check Connections
Check the connections in the open breaker circuit.

FIGURE 159. BREAKER OPEN CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

C. Check Breaker Status


Visually inspect the breaker. If the breaker is open, perform troubleshooting for the Breaker Aux
Failure.

NOTICE
If the breaker is a generator set breaker, there is typically no 'B' contact feedback.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 161 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

D. Check Switchgear Control Power Over Current Protection


WARNING
Electric Shock Hazard
Voltages and currents present an electrical shock hazard that can cause severe burns or
death.
Where personal protective equipment in accordance with regional and local regulations.

1. If a fuse is pulled out, push the fuse back in.


2. If a fuse is blown, replace the fuse.

E. Check I/O Island Output Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Breaker Open signal on the output module.

NOTICE
When the DMC is attempting to open the breaker, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the Breaker Open LED does not illuminate, verify that the output module is not sending a
signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
a. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
b. If the output module is fully seated, replace the output module.

F. Check Switchgear Interlocks


1. Check the control voltage at the pilot relay contact.
2. If there is no voltage at the contact, troubleshoot the switchgear interlocks. Refer to switchgear
schematic drawing in Appendix C on page 209.

G. Check Breaker Open Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Breaker Open when the DMC is
attempting to open the breaker.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

H. Check Circuit Breaker


Perform basic troubleshooting of the circuit breaker. Refer to the manufacturer's service manual and
follow the manufacturer's recommendations.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 162 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
Only authorized personnel should perform service on breakers.

7.1.1.4 Fail to Sync


Indicates that the sources on either side of a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie circuit breaker have
not synchronized with the utility before the Fail to Sync time delay expired.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

TABLE 24. RELATED SETTINGS

Location Setting
Protective Relay Parameters Permissive Frequency Window
Permissive Voltage Window
Permissive Window Time
Permissive Phase Window
InPower connected to MCM3320 Voltage Match Limit
Adjustments > Synchronizer Adjustments Frequency Match Limit

NOTICE
Disconnecting the J14 connector on the MCM3320 results in a Fail to Communicate with the
MCM. Make sure the system is in Manual mode before connecting with InPower.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the MCM3320, pilot relay, and I/O island output module, and the
MCM3320, TB21, and generator sets.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 163 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 160. SYNCHRONIZATION CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.
5. Reconnect any swapped bus sensing cables.
6. Reconnect any swapped load share cables.

B. Check MCM3320
Troubleshoot the MCM3320 in accordance with the MCM3320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787).

C. Check I/O Island Output Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Sync Enable signal on the output module.

NOTICE
When the sources are attempting to synchronize, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the Sync Enable LED does not illuminate, verify that the output module is not sending a
signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
a. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the output module.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 164 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

D. Check Sync Enable Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Sync Enable when the sources are
attempting to synchronize.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

7.1.1.5 Ground Fault


Indicates that the PLC has received an input from a Generator Set Main, Tie, Load (Feeder), or Generator
Set circuit breaker or its protective relay that the breaker has tripped due to a ground fault.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the circuit breaker or protective relay, terminal block, and I/O island
input module.

FIGURE 161. GROUND FAULT CONNECTIONS (LOW VOLTAGE)

FIGURE 162. GROUND FAULT CONNECTIONS (MEDIUM (HIGH) VOLTAGE OVER 1000 V)
1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Ground Fault Conditions


1. Check the trip status of the breaker or protective relay.
2. If the breaker or relay is tripped:
a. If a generator set caused the breaker to trip, refer to the generator set service manual.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 165 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

b. If a ground fault occurred downstream from the breaker, contact the electrical contractor
of the site and wait for the fault to clear.
c. If unsure that a ground fault caused the breaker to trip, collect as much data as possible
and refer to the Switchgear Product Support Plan (SP_00000022) for further support.
d. Reset the circuit breaker manually after the fault is cleared.
3. If the breaker or relay did not trip:
a. Check the contact on the breaker or protective relay corresponding to the ground fault.
b. If the contacts are closed, contact the manufacturer of the breaker or protective relay for
any additional troubleshooting.

NOTICE
Only authorized personnel should perform service on breakers or protective
relays.

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Ground Fault signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When there is no ground fault, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to Ground Fault on the input module is illuminated:


a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that the input module is receiving proper voltage at the control
voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.1.1.6 In Manual
Indicates that the PLC has lost the Breaker in Auto signal from a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie
circuit breaker.
Troubleshoot this alarm only if the alarm is received when the breaker is in Auto.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the Auto/Manual switch, terminal block, and I/O island input module.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 166 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

FIGURE 163. IN MANUAL CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Auto/Manual Switch


If the switch contacts are closed when the switch is in Auto, replace the Auto/Manual switch.

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the In Manual signal on the input module.

NOTICE
If the Auto/Manual switch is in Auto, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to In Manual on the input module is illuminated:


a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that the input module is receiving proper voltage at the control
voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.1.1.7 Lockout Trip


Indicates that the PLC has received an input from a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie, or Load
(feeder) circuit breaker that the breaker has tripped on a lockout (#86) condition.
The fault will remain active until it has been cleared at the circuit breaker/protective relay and #86 lockout
relay.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 167 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the circuit breaker or protective relay and the I/O island input
module.

FIGURE 164. LOCKOUT TRIP CONNECTIONS (WITHOUT PROTECTIVE RELAY)

FIGURE 165. LOCKOUT TRIP CONNECTIONS (WITH PROTECTIVE RELAY)


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Breaker Status


Visually inspect the breaker. If the breaker is tripped:
1. Repair any overcurrent or short circuit conditions on the circuit breaker or protective relay.
2. Wait for ground fault to be cleared.
3. Reset the protective relay (if applicable) and the #86 lockout relay.

C. Check Circuit Breaker Contacts


If there is no protective relay in the system, check the trip contacts on the circuit breaker. If the
breaker's trip unit has tripped or the breaker trip contacts are closed, contact the manufacturer for
troubleshooting.

D. Check Protective Relay Contacts


If there is a protective relay in the system, check the trip contacts on the protective relay. If the
contacts are closed, contact the manufacturer for troubleshooting.

E. Check Lockout Relay Contacts


Check the trip contacts on the #86 lockout relay.
1. If the relay is not in the normal/closed position, place it in the normal/closed position.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 168 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

2. If the trip contacts are closed, replace the #86 lockout relay.

F. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Breaker Tripped signal on the input module.

NOTICE
If the breaker is not tripped, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to Breaker Tripped on the input module is illuminated:


a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.1.1.8 Protective Relay Failure


Indicates that the health contact on the protective relay protecting the Generator Set Main, Utility Main,
Tie, Load (Feeder), or Generator Set circuit breaker has failed.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the protective relay, terminal block, and I/O island input module.

FIGURE 166. PROTECTIVE RELAY CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Protective Relay


Verify that the protective relay has failed.
1. Check the alarm history to determine if the failure was only a momentary failure.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 169 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

2. Check that the protective relay is not being serviced.


3. Check power to the protective relay. If there is a loss of power, refer to the switchgear
schematic drawing in Appendix C on page 209.
4. If the relay has failed, contact the manufacturer.

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Protective Relay Failure on the input module.

NOTICE
If there is no protective relay failure, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to Protective Relay Failure on the input module is illuminated:
a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that the input module is receiving proper voltage at the control
voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.1.1.9 Unexpected CB Close


Indicates that a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie, circuit breaker has closed, but the PLC did not
command the breaker to close.
This alarm is initiated when the breaker is closed manually with the DMC in Auto.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Breaker Status


Visually inspect the breaker. If the breaker is open, perform troubleshooting for the Breaker Aux
Failure.

NOTICE
If the breaker is a generator set breaker, there is typically no 'B' contact feedback.

7.1.1.10 Unexpected CB Open


Indicates that the PLC has received an input from a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie circuit breaker
that the breaker has been opened unexpectedly.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 170 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Breaker Status


Visually inspect the breaker.
1. If the breaker is locked out/tagged out, wait until maintenance on the system is complete and
the alarm is cleared.
2. If the breaker is closed, perform troubleshooting for the Breaker Aux Failure.

NOTICE
If the breaker is a generator set breaker, there is typically no 'B' contact feedback.

B. Check Connections
Check the direct trip signal connections.

FIGURE 167. DIRECT TRIP SIGNAL CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

C. Check for Direct Trip


1. Check the history on the protective relay or circuit breaker for indications of a direct trip.
2. If there is no sign of a direct trip, determine the reason the breaker has been opened manually.
3. If there was a direct trip, check that the Direct Trip signal is being received by the I/O island.

7.1.1.11 Unexpected Change to Manual


Indicates that the PLC has received an input from a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie circuit breaker
that the breaker is in manual mode of operation while the system is in Auto mode.
See troubleshooting for Breaker in Manual alarm.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 171 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

7.1.1.12 Unexpected Out of Cell


Indicates that the PLC has received an input from a Generator Set Main, Utility Main, or Tie circuit breaker
that the breaker is racked out of its cell while the system is in Auto mode.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the circuit breaker, terminal block, and I/O island input module.

FIGURE 168. RACKED IN CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Circuit Breaker Position


If the breaker is racked out, determine the reason the breaker has been racked out.

C. Check Breaker Truck Operated Contact


Check for closure at the breaker Racked In contact (Truck Operated contact (TOC)). If the contact is
open when the breaker is racked in, troubleshoot the breaker.

NOTICE
Only authorized personnel should perform service on breakers.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Racked In signal on the input module.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 172 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
When the breaker is racked in, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the LED corresponding to Racked In on the input module is not illuminated, verify that the
input module is receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts of the
I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open:
a. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

7.1.2 Generator Set Alarms


Generator set alarms are alarms that indicate a problem with a generator set. The generator set identifier
is displayed in front of the alarm text.
For generator set alarms that are not included in this section, refer to the generator set service manual.

7.1.2.1 Breaker Fail to Close


Indicates that the DMC has received this alarm from a generator set control.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Generator Set


Troubleshoot the following alarm in the generator set service manual.
• Fault Code 1452 - Genset CB Fail to Close

B. Check Connections
Check the connections in the generator set breaker fail to close circuit.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 173 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 169. BREAKER FAIL TO CLOSE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

C. Check Modbus Connections


Check the Modbus connections from the generator set to the DMC.

WARNING
Accidental starting can cause severe personal injury or death. Make sure the generator set
is not in Auto.

• Reconnect any disconnected connections.


• Tighten any loose connection.

7.1.2.2 Breaker Fail to Open


Indicates that the DMC has received this alarm from a generator set control. Refer to the generator set
service manual for specific information. When the DMC expects the generator set breaker to open and the
generator set fails to respond, the DMC can also generate this alarm.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Generator Set


Troubleshoot the following alarm in the generator set service manual.
• Fault Code 1453 - Genset CB Fail to Open
If the alarm is not displayed at the generator set, refer to the Switchgear Product Support Plan
(SP_00000022).

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 174 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

B. Check Connections
Check the connection in the generator set breaker fail to open circuit.

FIGURE 170. BREAKER FAIL TO OPEN CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

C. Check Generator Set Breaker Open Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Generator Set Breaker Open.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

7.1.2.3 Failed to Come Online


Indicates that the DMC has not received an indication that a generator set breaker closed within 30
seconds of sending a start signal.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 175 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 171. FAILED TO COME ONLINE CONNECTIONS

A. Check Generator Set Faults


Troubleshoot any generator set or generator set breaker faults at the generator set.

B. Generator Set Not Running


If the generator set is not running, the generator set may not have received the Start signal from the
DMC. It is also possible that the DMC did not receive a Common Shutdown signal from the
generator set resulting in a Start signal being sent in error.

B.1. No Generator Set Faults


1. Check Start signal connections between the I/O island output module and the generator set
control.
a. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
b. Tighten any loose connection.
c. Replace any cable that may be bad.
d. Repair any open circuits.
2. Verify I/O island output module operation.
a. Observe the LED corresponding to the Start signal on the output module.

NOTICE
When the Start signal is sent, the LED should be illuminated.

b. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input
plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 176 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

c. If the Start LED does not illuminate, verify that the output module is not sending a signal
by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
i. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
ii. If the module is fully seated, replace the output module.
3. Verify generator start pilot relay operation.
a. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Start.

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated when the DMC attempts to start the generator set.

b. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing
it at a separate test fixture.

c. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

B.2. Generator Set Has Active Shutdown Faults


1. Check Common Shutdown signal connections between the I/O island input module and the
generator set control.
a. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
b. Tighten any loose connection.
c. Replace any cable that may be bad.
d. Repair any open circuits.
2. Verify pilot relay operation.
a. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Common Shutdown.

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated when there is a common shutdown fault.

b. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing
it at a separate test fixture.

c. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.
3. Verify I/O island input module operation.
a. Observe the LED corresponding to the Common Shutdown signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When the Common Shutdown signal is received, the LED should be illuminated.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 177 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

b. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input
plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
c. If the Common Shutdown LED does not illuminate, verify that the input module is
receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts of the I/O
terminal plug. If the contacts are closed:
i. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
ii. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

C. Generator Set Running


If the generator set is running, the generator set breaker may not have closed because the generator
set control has received an Inhibit signal in error. It is also possible that the DMC did not receive
feedback from the breaker indicating that it was tripped or racked out resulting in a Start signal being
sent in error. The DMC also may not have received feedback from the generator set breaker that is
successfully closed.

C.1. Breaker not Closed and no Generator Set Faults


1. Check Inhibit signal connections between the I/O island output module and the generator set
control.
a. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
b. Tighten any loose connection.
c. Replace any cable that may be bad.
d. Repair any short to ground.
2. Verify I/O island put module operation.
a. Observe the LED corresponding to the Inhibit signal on the output module.

NOTICE
When the Inhibit signal is not being sent, the LED should not be illuminated.

b. If the Inhibit LED is illuminated, verify that the output module is not sending a signal by
checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are closed, refer to the
Switchgear Product Support Plan (A0 )
c. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input
plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. Verify Inhibit pilot relay operation.
a. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Inhibit.

NOTICE
The LED should not be illuminated during normal operation.

b. If the LED is illuminated, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing
it at a separate test fixture.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 178 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

c. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

C.2. Breaker Tripped Open Because of Fault


1. Check Tripped signal connections between the I/O island input module and the generator set
circuit breaker.
a. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
b. Tighten any loose connection.
c. Replace any cable that may be bad.
d. Repair any open circuit.
2. Verify I/O island input module operation.
a. Observe the LED corresponding to the Tripped signal on the input module.

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated if the breaker is tripped.

b. If the Tripped LED is not illuminated, check for closure a the corresponding contacts on
the I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
c. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input
plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

C.3. Breaker Racked Out


1. Check Racked In signal connections between the I/O island input module and the generator set
circuit breaker.
a. Replace any cable that may be bad.
b. Repair any short to ground.
2. Check breaker truck operated contact (TOC).
a. Check for closure at the TOC. When the breaker is racked out, the contacts should be
open.
b. If the contacts are closed, contact the breaker manufacturer for additional troubleshooting.
3. Verify I/O island input module operation.
a. Observe the LED corresponding to the Tripped signal on the input module.

NOTICE
The LED should not be illuminated when the breaker is racked out.

b. If the Racked In LED is illuminated, verify that the input module is receiving a signal by
checking for closure at the corresponding contacts of the I/O terminal block plug. If the
contacts are open, replace the input module.
c. If no LEDs are illuminated on the input module, verify that there is control voltage at the
control voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

C.4. Breaker Closed


Perform troubleshooting for the Breaker Aux Failure.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 179 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

NOTICE
There is no 'B' contact feedback for a generator set breaker.

7.1.2.4 Shutdown with Breaker Fail to Open


Indicates that the generator set has had a shutdown fault and its circuit breaker has failed to open.

NOTICE
This is considered a dangerous alarm. All other generator sets go offline and the GM breaker
(or ?? for common bus systems) opens.

This alarm becomes active after all of the following events.


• Generator X Common Shutdown signal is closed (generator set output to the I/O island)
• Generator X CB Aux 'A' signal is closed (paralleling breaker output to the I/O island)
• CB Fail Time Delay expires
Refer to the Breaker Fail to Open alarm for troubleshooting.
Refer to the generator set service manual for troubleshooting any active generator set faults.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

7.1.3 Load Control Alarms


Load control alarms indicate a problem with the generator set loads.

7.1.3.1 Load Control Disabled


Indicates that the DMC is no longer able to control the load/feeder breakers.
The text "Bus X" is included in front of the alarm text, where X is the bus number.
Refer to the following alarms for troubleshooting:
• System in Manual
• In Manual (UM or GM breaker)
• Unexpected CB Open (UM or GM breaker)
• Unexpected Out of Cell (UM or GM breaker)
• Island XX Communication Alarm

7.1.3.2 Invalid Load Dump Signal


Indicates that the PLC received a load dump signal from a generator set that is not connected to the load
bus.
Look at the Oneline diagram and the Events screen to determine which generator set(s) were not online
when the alarm occurred.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 180 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Generator Set


Check the contacts for load dump/overload for any generator sets that were offline when the alarm
was activated. The contacts should not be closed when the generator set is offline. Refer to the
generator set service manual.

NOTICE
This may be an intermittent problem.

B. Check Load Dump Pilot Relay


Perform the following steps for each generator set that was offline.
1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Load Dump.

NOTICE
The LED should not be illuminated if there is no load dump condition.

2. If the LED is illuminated:


a. Check for closure at the coil contacts on the pilot relay.
b. If the coil contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and
the pilot relay.
c. If the coil contacts are open, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing
it at a separate test fixture.

d. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


Perform the following for each generator set that was offline.
Observe the LED corresponding to the Load Dump signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When there is no load dump, the LED should not be illuminated.

1. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
2. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the pilot relay and the input
module.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 181 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

3. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.

7.1.3.3 Load Bus 'X' Shed Level 'X' Active


An information alarm that indicates the PLC received a load dump signal from a generator set on the bus.

A. Check for Overload Alarm


If this alarm condition is received unexpectedly, check for an Overload Alarm and perform the
necessary troubleshooting.

7.1.3.4 Overload Alarm


Indicates that the DMC has received a load dump signal from a generator set, indicating that the bus is
overloaded. The generator set bus overload condition occurs when an operational generator set is either 3
Hz below nominal frequency for 3 seconds or above 105% of load for 60 seconds.
The most common reason for an overload is when a generator set on the bus has a shutdown fault that
causes the other generator sets on the bus to overload.

TABLE 25. RELATED SETTINGS

Location Setting
Load Control Screen Load Add Parameters
Setup Load Bus (or Load Bus 1) Settings Screen Load Add Genbus Delay
Setup Load Bus (or Load Bus 2) Settings Screen Required Online Capacity
Min. Capacity to Connect
Setup Meter Settings Meter Parameters

Refer to the generator set service manual for troubleshooting.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

7.1.3.5 Quick Shed


Indicates that the DMC has detected the loss of a generator set and the quick shed sequence has been
initiated.
Quick shed is started when the failure of a generator set will have a significant affect on the stability of the
generator sets supply. When quick shed is enabled, all loads except Load Level 0 are shed as the
generator set shutdown occurs. After the loads are shed, the Load Add sequence is restarted. Loads are
added based on the Required Online Capacity.

A. Check Generator Set


Troubleshoot the generator set per the generator set service manual.

7.1.4 Communication Alarms


Communication alarms provide information when a device in the system loses communication. If there are
multiple devices of the same type, the number of the device is included in the alarm text.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 182 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

7.1.4.1 Gen 'X' Communication Failure


Indicates that the PLC has lost communication with a generator set.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the PLC network card and generator set control.

FIGURE 172. GEN COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS (NEW CONTROLS)

FIGURE 173. GEN COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS (LEGACY CONTROLS)


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Power
Check the power LEDs on the LonWorks gateway, UNI commserver, and Ethernet switch. If a
component is not powered on:
1. Measure the voltage across the 24 VDC +/- plug.
2. If there is no voltage at the plug, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage at the plug:
a. If the plug is not fully seated, reseat the plug.
b. Replace the component.

C. Check Generator Set


Troubleshoot the generator set per generator set manufacturer's recommendations.

7.1.4.2 ATS 'X' Communication Failure


Indicates that the PLC has lost communication with an ATS.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 183 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the PLC network card, Ethernet Switch, UNI comserver, LonWorks,
and ATS.

FIGURE 174. ATS COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Power
Check the power LEDs on the LonWorks gateway, UNI commserver, and Ethernet switch. If a
component is not powered on:
1. Measure the voltage across the 24 VDC +/- plug.
2. If there is no voltage at the plug, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage at the plug:
a. If the plug is not fully seated, reseat the plug.
b. Replace the component.

C. Check ATS
Troubleshoot the ATS per generator set manufacturer's recommendations.

7.1.4.3 Island 'XX' Communication Alarm


Indicates that the PLC CPU has lost communication with the I/O island for longer than 300 ms.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the PLC and the I/O island or between the islands.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 184 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

FIGURE 175. ISLAND COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS


1. Observe the indicators on the network module of the I/O island.
2. If the PWR LED is not illuminated:
a. Make sure the connector is fully lodged into the 24VDC 0.55A socket, and connect if
necessary.
b. Troubleshoot the power supply to the I/O island.
3. Check the Ethernet connections between the I/O Island and the device connected to Link 1 and
2.
If the port's bottom LED is not blinking green:
a. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is connected at both ends, and reconnect if necessary.
b. If communication is still not established, connect a known good Ethernet cable between
the ports.
c. If communication is established, replace the Ethernet cable.

7.1.4.4 Meter 'X' Communication Failure


Indicates that the PLC has lost communication with the meter connected to the DMC.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the PLC and the meter.

FIGURE 176. METER COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS (MCM3320)

A063J840 (Issue 1) 185 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 177. METER COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS (CUSTOMER METER)


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Power
Check the power LEDs on the UNI commserver and Ethernet switch. If a component is not powered
on:
1. Measure the voltage across the 24 VDC +/- plug.
2. If there is no voltage at the plug, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage at the plug:
a. If the plug is not fully seated, reseat the plug.
b. If the plug is fully seated, replace the component.

C. Check MCM3320 Power


If applicable, check the LEDs on the MCM3320. If it is not being powered:
1. Measure the voltage across the voltage input pins.
2. If there is no voltage, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage, refer to the MCM3320/SYNC1320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787) to
troubleshoot the MCM3320.

7.1.4.5 PLC Communication Failure


Indicates that the HMI has lost communication with the PLC for more than 10 seconds.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the PLC network card and the HMI.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 186 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

FIGURE 178. PLC COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS


1. Observe the PLC and IPC (HMI) Link LEDs on the Ethernet switch.
2. If either of the Link LEDs is not illuminated:
a. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is connected at both ends, and reconnect if necessary.
b. If communication is still not established, connect a known good Ethernet cable between
the ports.
c. If communication is established, replace the Ethernet cable.

B. Check Power
Check the power LEDs on the PLC and Ethernet switch. If a component is not powered on:
1. Measure the voltage across the 24 VDC +/- plug.
2. If there is no voltage at the plug, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage at the plug:
a. If the plug is not fully seated, reseat the plug.
b. If the plug is fully seated, replace the component.

7.1.5 DMC I/O Alarms


DMC I/O alarms indicate that there is a problem with an I/O island. The island identifier is included in the
alarm text.
The I/O islands are connected in a ring with Ethernet cables. If one connection breaks, all islands are still
able to communicate.

FIGURE 179. I/O ISLAND ETHERNET RING

A063J840 (Issue 1) 187 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

7.1.5.1 Island 'XX' Device Failure


Indicates that there is a serious fault on the I/O island that is inhibiting its operation.

A. Check I/O Island Modules


1. Observe the RDY LED for each module in the failed I/O island.
2. If any of the RDY LEDs are off or blinking, make sure the module is fully seated and reseat if
necessary.
3. If the LED is still off or blinking, replace the I/O module.

B. Check DROP Diagnostic Parameters


For additional troubleshooting, navigate to the DROP Diagnostic Parameters screen and, if
necessary, refer to the Switchgear Product Support Plan (SP_00000022).

7.1.5.2 Island 'XX' Device Warning


Indicates that there is a problem with the I/O island but it is still functional.

A. Investigate Hot Swap


If a module in the I/O island has been hot swapped:

CAUTION
Before cycling power on the circuit, take appropriate measures to prevent unexpected
operation of the system.

1. Cycle power to the I/O island.


2. Select the Alarm Reset button on the Current Alarms screen control panel to clear the alarm.

B. Check DROP Diagnostic Parameters


For additional troubleshooting, navigate to the DROP Diagnostic Parameters screen and, if
necessary, refer to the Switchgear Product Support Plan (SP_00000022).

7.1.5.3 Island 'XX' Link 1 Failure and Island 'XX' Link 2 Failure
Indicates that the PLC has received a signal from the I/O island that it has lost connection on one of its
links.
• Example: Island 12 Link 1 Failure - Indicates that Island 12 has lost communication on Link 1
(Ethernet Port 1).

A. Check Connections
Check the Ethernet connections between the I/O Island and the device connected to Link 1 or 2.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 188 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

FIGURE 180. LINK FAILURE CONNECTIONS


If the port's bottom LED is not blinking green:
1. Make sure that the Ethernet cable is connected at both ends, and reconnect if necessary.
2. If communication is still not established, replace the Ethernet cable.

7.1.6 System Alarms


System alarms indicate a problem with the system.

7.1.6.1 HMI Low Disk Space


Indicates that there is less than 100 MB of disk space left on HMI Disk D. The DMC does not log data
while this alarm is active.
Back up any reports that are stored on the HMI disk and delete them from the disk.

7.1.6.2 Low Fuel Main Tank


Indicates that the PLC has received a low fuel level signal.

A. Check Fuel Level


If the fuel level is low, fill the tank.

B. Check Fuel Level Sensor


Check the output of the fuel level sensor to make sure it is sending the appropriate fuel level to the
DMC. If not, troubleshoot the fuel level sensor.

C. Check Connections
Check the fuel sensor connections from the tank to the DMC.
1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Repair any short or open circuits.

7.1.6.3 MCM 'X' Hardware Failure


Indicates that the PLC has lost closure on the health contact from the MCM3320.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A063J840 (Issue 1) 189 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the MCM3320, pilot relay, and I/O island input module.

FIGURE 181. MCM HARDWARE FAILURE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check MCM3320 Power


If applicable, check the LEDs on the MCM3320. If it is not being powered:
1. Measure the voltage across the voltage input pins.
2. If there is no voltage, troubleshoot the associated 24 V circuit breakers.
3. If there is voltage, refer to the MCM3320/SYNC1320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787) to
troubleshoot the MCM3320.

C. Troubleshoot MCM3320 Code 343 - Hardware Failure


If the Code 343 - Hardware Failure is active on the MCM3320, refer to the MCM3320/SYNC1320
Control Service Manual (A029Y787) for troubleshooting the fault.

NOTICE
Disconnecting the J14 connector on the MCM3320 results in a Fail to Communicate with the
MCM. Make sure the system is in Manual before connecting InPower.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the MCM Hardware Failure signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When there is no MCM failure, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to MCM Hardware Failure on the input module is illuminated:
a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 190 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the pilot relay and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that the input module is receiving proper voltage at the control
voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

E. Check Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to the MCM Hardware Failure when there is
no hardware failure.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

7.1.6.4 Neutral Ground Resistor 'X' Fault


Indicates that the PLC has received a signal from the Neutral Ground Resistor (NGR) protective relay.
The NGR is typically connected between the neutral of the generator set bus and the ground. The NGR
limits fault currents when there is a ground fault in the system. A CT is typically connected to a 51G
protective relay. When the protective relay senses a ground fault, a timer is started to allow the system to
clear the fault. If the fault is not cleared before the timer expires, the protective relay trips the generator set
breaker.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

7.1.6.5 Remote E-Stop Active


Indicates that the PLC has received a Remote E-Stop Active signal.
Troubleshoot this alarm only if the alarm is received an emergency stop has not been activated. Perform
troubleshooting for a local and/or remote E-Stop.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections in the E-Stop operated circuit.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 191 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 182. E-STOP OPERATED CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check E-Stop Contacts


Check the E-Stop contacts for closure. If the contacts are not closed, replace the E-Stop.

C. Check E-Stop Jumper


Make sure the jumper across is terminals is in place. If not, replace the jumper.

D. Check E-Stop Pilot Relay


If there is no voltage at the coil contacts of the pilot relay and if the N.C. contacts are open, replace
the pilot relay cartridge.

E. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Remote E-Stop Operated signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When the E-Stop is not active, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 192 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

3. If the LED corresponding to Remote E-Stop Operated on the input module is not illuminated,
verify that the input module is receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding
contacts of the I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open:
a. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

7.1.6.6 Station Power from Batteries


Indicates that the PLC has received a signal from the UPS that AC power is no longer available and that 1
minute has passed since the loss of power.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the main AC circuit breaker, power supply, and I/O island input
module.

FIGURE 183. STATION POWER CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check AC Power Supply


1. If the AC disconnect breaker is not closed, close it.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 193 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

2. Measure the voltage at TB120-A1 (UL) or TB240-A1 (CE).


3. If there is no voltage, contact the facility maintenance.

C. Check Power Supply


1. Measure the input voltage at Input AC 100-240 V terminals.
2. Measure the output voltage at Output DC 24V 10A terminals.
3. If input voltage is present but no output voltage, replace the power supply.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


Observe the LED corresponding to the Station Power from Battery signal on the input module.

NOTICE
If the alarm signal is not reaching the input module, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to Station Power from Battery on the input module is illuminated:
1. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
2. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the UPS and the input module.
3. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.

7.1.6.7 Station Power UPS Alarm


Indicates that the PLC has received a signal from the UPS that there is an issue with the UPS.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Check Battery Fuses


Check both fuses in the battery compartment. If a fuse is disconnected or blown, replace the fuse.

B. Check Batteries
1. Check batteries for corrosion or signs of damage.
2. Check battery connections.
3. Check battery voltage at terminals.
4. Replace any bad battery per battery manufacturer's recommendations.

7.1.6.8 PLC Failure


Indicates that there is a failure in the PLC CPU.

A. Reload PLC Software


Perform the PC to PLC Transfer procedure in Section 6.3.2 on page 145 to load the backup PLC
software.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 194 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

B. Replace PLC Processor


Perform the PLC removal procedure in Section 6.4.2 on page 148.

7.1.6.9 Utility 'X' Failure


Indicates that the utility bus voltage is continuously less than the utility under voltage dropout threshold for
a longer time than the dropout delay.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the utility voltage input and the I/O island input module.

FIGURE 184. UTILITY FAILURE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check MCM3320
If the Utility Available output (TB2-18) on the MCM3320 is being driven low, the MCM has detected
that the utility is not available. This indicates that one of the following Power Transfer Control (PTC)
sensors has dropped out.
• Under voltage
• Over voltage
• Frequency
• Loss of Phase
• Phase Rotation
Troubleshoot the MCM3320 in accordance with the MCM3320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787).

NOTICE
Disconnecting the J14 connector on the MCM3320 results in a Fail to Communicate with the
MCM. Make sure the system is in Manual mode before connecting with InPower.

C. Check Utility Available Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Utility Available when there are no utility
faults.
2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 195 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Utility Available signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When there is no utility failure, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the LED corresponding to Utility Available on the input module is not illuminated, verify that
the input module is receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts of
I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open:
a. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
b. Replace the input module.

7.1.6.10 Utility 'X' Failure


Indicates that the utility bus voltage is continuously less than the utility under voltage dropout threshold for
a longer time than the dropout delay.

A. Check Connections
Check the connections between the protective relay and the I/O island input module.

FIGURE 185. UTILITY FAILURE CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check Protective Relay Contacts


Check the utility failure contacts on the protective relay. If the contacts are closed, contact the
manufacturer for troubleshooting.

C. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Utility Fail signal on the input module.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 196 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
If there is no utility failure, the LED should not be illuminated.

If the LED corresponding to Utility Fail on the input module is illuminated:


a. Check for closure at the corresponding contacts on the I/O terminal block plug.
b. If the contacts are closed, repair any short in the wiring between the switchgear and the
input module.
c. If the contacts are open, replace the input module.
2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.1.7 Power Transfer Alarms


Power transfer alarms are related to the transfer of power between the utility and the generator sets. The
text "Transfer Pair X" is in front of the alarm text, where X is the transfer pair number.

7.1.7.1 Transfer Pair 'X' Failed to Disconnect


Indicates that the DMC has attempted to open both the main breakers in the transfer pair (GM, UM, and/or
Tie circuit breaker) and both breakers failed to open.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

A. Troubleshoot Other Breaker Faults


Other breaker faults will be activated before this fault. Troubleshoot all other breaker related faults
first.

7.1.7.2 Transfer Pair 'X' Minimum Capacity not Met


Indicates that the Minimum Capacity to Connect time (default 30 seconds) has expired before the
minimum amount of spare capacity required to connect the generator sets to the load bus via the
generator set main breaker (GM) has been reached after the generator sets were signaled to start.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

TABLE 26. RELATED SETTINGS

Location Setting
Load Bus Setup Screen Required Online Capacity
Min. Capacity to Connect

A063J840 (Issue 1) 197 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

7.1.7.3 Transfer Pair 'X' Ramp Load Failure


Indicates that the transfer pair has failed to completely transfer the load to the generator sets within the
Max Ramp Time.

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

TABLE 27. RELATED SETTINGS

Location Setting
Setup System Settings Max Ramp Time
Generator Set Control Load Ramp Time
Setup Meter Settings Meter Parameters

A. Check Connections
Check the connections in the transfer pair ramp load circuit.

FIGURE 186. RAMP LOAD CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 198 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

B. Check MCM3320
If the Utility Source Unloaded output (TB2-15) on the MCM3320 is being driven low, the generator
set bus is unloaded.
Troubleshoot the MCM3320 in accordance with the MCM3320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787).

NOTICE
Disconnecting the J14 connector on the MCM3320 results in a Fail to Communicate with the
MCM. Make sure the system is in Manual mode before connecting with InPower.

C. Check Utility Source Unloaded Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Utility Source Unloaded.

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated (N.O. contacts closed) when the generator source is
unloaded.

2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Utility Source Unloaded signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When the utility is unloaded, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the LED corresponding to Utility Source Unloaded on the input module is not illuminated,
verify that the input module is receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding
contacts of the I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open:
a. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

7.1.7.4 Transfer Pair 'X' Ramp Unload Failure


Indicates that the transfer pair has failed to completely transfer the load to the utility within the Max Ramp
Time.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 199 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

NOTICE
This alarm is latched. A latched alarm is not cleared until the DMC reset button is pressed and
the alarm condition no longer exists. The alarm reset button must be pressed after each
troubleshooting corrective action to determine if the problem has been resolved (alarm cleared).

TABLE 28. RELATED SETTINGS

Location Setting
Setup System Settings Max Ramp Time
Setup Meter Settings Meter Parameters

A. Check Connections
Check the connections in the transfer pair ramp unload circuit.

FIGURE 187. RAMP UNLOAD CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.
4. Repair any open circuits.

B. Check MCM3320
If the Generator Source Unloaded output (TB2-16) on the MCM3320 is being driven low, the
generator set bus is unloaded.
Troubleshoot the MCM3320 in accordance with the MCM3320 Control Service Manual (A029Y787).

NOTICE
Disconnecting the J14 connector on the MCM3320 results in a Fail to Communicate with the
MCM. Make sure the system is in Manual mode before connecting with InPower.

C. Check Generator Source Unloaded Pilot Relay


1. Observe the LED on the pilot relay corresponding to Generator Source Unloaded.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 200 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated (N.O. contacts closed) when the generator source is
unloaded.

2. If the LED does not illuminate, test the pilot relay by applying voltage to its coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

3. If the N.O. relay contacts do not behave as expected, replace the pilot relay cartridge.

D. Check I/O Island Input Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Generator Source Unloaded signal on the input module.

NOTICE
When the generator sets are unloaded, the LED should be illuminated.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that there is control voltage at the control voltage input plug. If
not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the LED corresponding to Generator Source Unloaded on the input module is not illuminated,
verify that the input module is receiving a signal by checking for closure at the corresponding
contacts of the I/O terminal block plug. If the contacts are open:
a. If the input module is not fully seated, reseat the input module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the input module.

7.2 Symptom Based


Diagnosis of some problems involves observing system operation.
Before troubleshooting symptom based problems, observe the status of the system to make sure that a
problem actually exists. Check that the system settings on the System Control screen are set correctly.
• Control Selection
• Loadbus Selection
• System Mode
• Transition Type
Also make sure that all active alarms have been cleared.

7.2.1 Alarm Horn Sounding Continuously


The alarm horn continues to sound after silencing the alarm on the Current Alarms screen control panel.

A. Check I/O Island Output Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Audible Alarm signal on the output module.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 201 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated if there is an active alarm that initiates the audible
alarm.

2. If there are no LEDs illuminated, verify that the output module is receiving proper voltage at the
control voltage plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the Audible Alarm LED is not illuminated, verify that the output module is not sending a signal
by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
a. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
b. If the module is fully seated, replace the output module.

B. Check Pilot Relay


1. If the LED corresponding to Audible Alarm on the pilot relay doesn't illuminate when the I/O
island is sending the Audible Alarm signal, apply voltage to the pilot relay coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

2. If the NC contacts do not open, replace the pilot relay.

7.2.2 Alarm Horn Does not Sound


The alarm horn doesn't sound when there is an active alarm.

A. Check I/O Island Output Module


1. Observe the LED corresponding to the Audible Alarm signal on the output module.

NOTICE
The LED should be illuminated if there is an active alarm that initiates the audible
alarm.

2. If no LEDs are illuminated, verify that the output module is receiving proper voltage at the
control voltage input plug. If not, troubleshoot the supply circuit.
3. If the Audible Alarm LED does not illuminate, verify that the output module is not sending a
signal by checking for closure at the corresponding contacts. If the contacts are open:
a. If the output module is not fully seated, reseat the output module.
b. If the output module is fully seated, replace the output module.

B. Check Pilot Relay


1. If the LED corresponding to Audible Alarm on the pilot relay doesn't illuminate when the I/O
island is sending the Audible Alarm signal, apply voltage to the pilot relay coil.

NOTICE
The functionality of the relay can also be tested by removing the relay and testing it at
a separate test fixture.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 202 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 7. Troubleshooting

2. If the NC contacts do not close, replace the pilot relay.

C. Check Best Battery Voltage


Check for best battery voltage at the alarm horn.
1. If there is voltage at the alarm horn, replace the alarm horn.
2. If there is no voltage at the alarm horn, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

7.2.3 Generator Set Not Running When Should Be


A generator set that should be running is not running or has been shut down.
The DMC does not send a start signal to a generator set if any of the following faults are active for the
generator set:
• [Breaker Name] Breaker Protective Relay Failure
• [Breaker Name] Breaker Lockout Trip (for any generator set on the bus)
• [Breaker Name] Breaker Fail to Open
• [Breaker Name] Breaker Fail to Close
• [Breaker Name] Breaker Unexpected Out of Cell
• [Generator Name] Common Shutdown Fault
• [Generator Name] Not in Auto
• [Generator Name] Shutdown with Breaker Fail to Open
• [Generator Name] X NEC Fail to Open
Refer the [Generator Name] Fail to Come Online alarm for troubleshooting.
Refer to the generator set service manual.

7.2.4 Touchscreen is Blank


Nothing is being displayed on the touchscreen.

A. Touch the Screen


Touch the screen to wake up the display.

B. Check Power
Check for power at the touchscreen and industrial PC (IPC).
1. If the LED on the bottom right of the touchscreen is not illuminated, press the power button on
the rear of the touchscreen.
2. If the LED is illuminated on the touchscreen, use the Source button on the rear of the
touchscreen to change the video source if necessary.
3. If the LED on the top of the IPC is not illuminated, press the power button on the IPC.
4. If the IPC does not power on, troubleshoot the supply circuit.

C. Check Connections
Check the connections between the touchscreen, IPC, and the PLC.

A063J840 (Issue 1) 203 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


7. Troubleshooting 7-2019

FIGURE 188. TOUCHSCREEN CONNECTIONS


1. Reconnect any disconnected connection.
2. Tighten any loose connection.
3. Replace any cable that may be bad.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 204 A063J840 (Issue 1)


Appendix A. Outline Drawings

A063J840 (Issue 1) 205 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix A. Outline Drawings 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 206 A063J840 (Issue 1)


Appendix B. Interconnect Drawings

A063J840 (Issue 1) 207 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix B. Interconnect Drawings 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 208 A063J840 (Issue 1)


Appendix C. Schematic Drawings

A063J840 (Issue 1) 209 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix C. Schematic Drawings 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 210 A063J840 (Issue 1)


Appendix D. Bills of Material

A063J840 (Issue 1) 211 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix D. Bills of Material 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 212 A063J840 (Issue 1)


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS
POWER GENERATION GROUP

PROJECT NAME: Equinix - SE-4-2 ECO NO. LTR. NO. REVISION DR CHKR ENG DATE
DISTRIBUTOR: Cummins Pacific PC123838 A 1 PRODUCTION RELEASE, AS-BUILT JG JG JG 23-Jul-19
ORDER NUMBER: 7384760

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ENTER A BRIEF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

MODEL: DMCDDBABCA0256
NUMBER OF GENS: 9
GEN TYPE(S): PCC3201
BRKR TYPE(S):
LA/LS:
C/W:

DRAWING NUMBERS

OUTLINE: A061F179
SCHEMATIC: A061F182
INTERCONNECTION: A061F181

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
EQUIPMENT TO BE OFFERED FOR TESTING
AND INSPECTION
LIFTING: ADEQUATE AND SAFE LIFTING FACILITIES
TO BE PROVIDED
DEVIATIONS: NO DEVIATIONS WILL BE ACCEPTED
WITHOUT FULL WRITTEN PREMISSION FROM
CPGK
DELIVERY: TO BE ADVISED
TERMS AND CONDITIONS: CPGK STANDARD AVAILABLE VIA www.cumminspower.com/terms

TITLE: PANEL,CONTROL
ENG: J. GUNDLURI
CHKR: J. GUNDLURI
APPRVD: J. GUNDLURI
DWG #: A061A232

(SHEET 1 OF 3) Equinix - SE-4-2


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS
POWER GENERATION GROUP

ITEM CPG P/N CPG LEGACY QTY DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER P/N SPECIFICATIONS S.L.
101 A049V849 2 DMC8000 SEISMIC ENCLOSURE HOFFMAN WITHOUT DOOR
102 A061G220 1 DMC8000 ENCLOSURE DOOR HOFFMAN STANDARD WITH 1 ELECTROSWITCH
103 A058T549 1 DMC8000 ENCLOSURE DOOR HOFFMAN STANDARD WITH 2 ELECTROSWITCH
104 A052T834 2 DMC8000 LABELS
105 A054H472 2 DMC8000 SEISMIC LABEL
106 A001X246 0414-1329 2 CRATE - DOMESTIC 36" X 36" X 94"
107 A041E508 51 100-C CONTACTOR AB 100-C16EJ10 4 N/O, 0 N/C
108 A051F988 2 30mm SOUNDER/LIGHT ABB CB1-610R RED ILLUMINATION
109 A049K341 2 19" HMI TOUCHSCREEN ADVANTECH FPM-5191G-R3B1 PREWIRED W/UNO2178
110 A007P022 8 4 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE BELDEN 9418 AS REQUIRED
111 A029N421 3 2 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE BELDEN 9841 AS REQUIRED
112 A005F853 2 MCM3320 CUMMINS 0327-1520-01 FULL FEATURED
113 A061J390 2 AUTO/MANUAL MODE SWITCH ELECTROSWITCH 2NO, 2NC PER DECK; 8 DECK
114 A006X504 1 AUTO/MANUAL MODE SWITCH ELECTROSWITCH 24PK204LA 8 FORM C
115 A054V134 2 MODBUS/LONWORKS TO ETHERNET FIELDSERVER FPC-N35-1001 RJ45, LONWORKS, RS485 (2 WIRE)
116 A048S217 2 GROUNDING BAR SYSTEM HOFFMAN PGS4K PLATED COPPER
117 A048S234 2 LED ENCLOSURE LIGHT HOFFMAN LED24V15 470 LUMENS
118 A048S237 2 DOORSWITCH ASSEMBLY HOFFMAN PLFSWD LINEAR, ON END
119 A048S326 2 2200x800 ENCLOSURE SUBPANEL HOFFMAN PPF228G GALVANIZED
120 A048S330 2 2200x800 ENCLOSURE SUBPANEL HOFFMAN PPFSM228G GALVANIZED
121 A049J651 2 DATA INTERFACE PORT HOFFMAN G7455 1 RJ45, 2 USB
122 A049T815 2 2200x800 ENCLOSURE SUBPANEL HOFFMAN PPFSM228G GALVANIZED
123 A047C626 7 DUAL RECTIFIER IXYS DSEP2X31-12A 1200V
124 A041G847 11 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MODICON BMXCPS2010 24VDC, 16.8W
125 A041G918 7 4 SLOT BACKPLANE MODICON BMXXBP0400 X-BUS
126 A047R998 2 6 SLOT BACKPLANE MODICON BMXXBP0600 X-BUS
127 A049K352 15 DISCRETE DC INPUT MODICON BMXDDI1602 24VDC, 16 ISOLATED INPUTS, SINK
128 A052F174 9 REMOTE I/O DROP MODICON BMXCRA31210 ETHERNET REMOTE I/O APPLICATIONS
129 A056D407 2 HOT STANDBY SFP MODULE MODICON 490NAC0201 FIBER OPTIC, SINGLE MODE
130 A056D408 2 HOT STANDBY CPU MODICON BMEH584040 2048 kB DATA, 16MB MAX PROGRAM
131 A056D422 2 ETHERNET TCP/IP NETWORK MODULE MODICON BMENOC0301 EMBEDDED MULTIPORT SWITCH
132 A056N890 2 4 SLOT BACKPLANE MODICON BMEXBP0400 X-BUS + ETHERNET
133 A058A215 11 DISCRETE RELAY OUTPUT MODICON BMXDRA1605 24VDC, 2A, 16 OUTPUTS
134 A049K339 7 CONTROL RELAY ASSEMBLY OMRON MY4N-D2 DC24(S) 4 FORM C
135 A002B947 37 SLOTTED WIRING DUCT PANDUIT F1X3LG6/C1LG6 LIGHT GRAY
136 A051F985 29 SLOTTED WIRING DUCT PANDUIT F2X3LG6/C2LG6 LIGHT GRAY
137 A014U125 133 END BRACKET, E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 GREY
138 A028Z053 2 POWER SUPPLY, QUINT-PS PHOENIX CONTACT 2866763 INPUT: 120/240VAC
139 A029A411 19 TERMINAL STYLE CONTROL RELAY PHOENIX CONTACT 2967620 1 FORM C
140 A030U529 14 SPACER PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047303 GREY
141 A030U842 39 END PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047293 GREY
142 A030V678 1107 TERMINAL BLOCK, UT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044076 GREY
143 A030V680 89 END PLATE, UT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047028 GREY
144 A030W306 6 EARTHING TERMINAL BLOCK, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044665 GREEN/YELLOW
145 A034E763 110 TERMINAL STYLE CONTROL RELAY PHOENIX CONTACT 2966171 1 FORM C
146 A034N108 123 TERMINAL BLOCK, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044652 GREY
147 A034N110 9 RECTIFIER TERMINAL BLOCK, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3046650 600V
148 A040L553 2 FL COMSERVER UNI PHOENIX CONTACT 2313452 RS232, RS422, OR RS485 (2 WIRE)
149 A043H869 2 UIINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY, QUINT-UPS PHOENIX CONTACT 2320225 IQ/SFB TECHNOLOGY

DWG NO.: A002A001 (SHEET 2 OF 3) My Project


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS
POWER GENERATION GROUP

ITEM CPG P/N CPG LEGACY QTY DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER P/N SPECIFICATIONS S.L.
150 A043K841 2 BATTERY, UPS-BAT/7.2Ah PHOENIX CONTACT 2320319 IQ TECHNOLOGY
151 A048H417 2 ETHERNET PATCH PANEL PHOENIX CONTACT 2901646 TWO RJ45 PORTS, SOCKET-SOCKET
152 A048J015 2 FL SWITCH SFN 16TX PHOENIX CONTACT 2891933 16 RJ45 PORTS
153 A049K330 2 CT SHORTING TERMINAL ASSEMBLY PHOENIX CONTACT 3047400/3047413 GREY
154 A034H170 40 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 60110 240VAC/60VDC, BOX LUG
155 A034H172 10 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 60101 240VAC/60VDC, BOX LUG
156 A034H174 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 60104 240VAC/60VDC, BOX LUG
157 A034H176 6 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 60105 240VAC/60VDC, BOX LUG
158 A034Y024 21 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC MGN61302 480Y/277VAC, BOX LUG
159 A049K359 3 BUS PT SENSING MODULE SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC MG24110/MG10287 12 SINGLE POLE, 1A
160 A052E892 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC 60139 240VAC/125VDC, BOX LUG
161 A000Y856 2 DUAL TWISTED PAIR CABLE VENDOR SOURCE CONTROLLED 300 METERS
162 A003C875 4 GROMMET VENDOR SOURCE CONTROLLED 3.25" HOLE
163 A003C898 2 GROMMET VENDOR SOURCE CONTROLLED 2" HOLE
164 A049P148 20 SHIELDED CAT 5e CABLE VENDOR SOURCE CONTROLLED AS REQUIRED
165 A050F648 2292 CABLE - 20 AWG SIS
166 A034J559 2886 CABLE - 18 AWG SIS
167 A030H628 4230 CABLE - 14 AWG SIS
168 A056Z161 1 SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLE QUICKTRON 810-LL7-009 3 METERS
169 A030S649 1 2-POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BG4 22MM KEY OPERATED
170 A030L222 3 CONTACT BLOCK SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZBE-101 1 NO
171 A030R856 1 MOUNTING COLLAR SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC ZB4BZ009

DWG NO.: A002A001 (SHEET 3 OF 3) My Project


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS
POWER GENERATION GROUP

PROJECT NAME: Equinix - SE-4-2 ECO NO. LTR. NO. REVISION DR CHKR ENG DATE
DISTRIBUTOR: Cummins Pacific PC123838 A 1 PRODUCTION RELEASE, AS-BUILT JG JG JG 23-Jul-19
ORDER NUMBER: 7384760

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

ENTER A BRIEF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

MODEL: SWGDDBABCA0170
NUMBER OF GENS: 9
GEN TYPE(S): PCC3201
BRKR TYPE(S):
LA/LS:
C/W:

DRAWING NUMBERS

OUTLINE: A061F180
SCHEMATIC: A061F183
INTERCONNECTION: A061F181

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
EQUIPMENT TO BE OFFERED FOR TESTING
AND INSPECTION
LIFTING: ADEQUATE AND SAFE LIFTING FACILITIES
TO BE PROVIDED
DEVIATIONS: NO DEVIATIONS WILL BE ACCEPTED
WITHOUT FULL WRITTEN PREMISSION FROM
CPGK
DELIVERY: TO BE ADVISED
TERMS AND CONDITIONS: CPGK STANDARD AVAILABLE VIA www.cumminspower.com/terms

TITLE: PANEL,CONTROL
ENG: J. GUNDLURI
CHKR: J. GUNDLURI
APPRVD: J. GUNDLURI
DWG #: A061A233

(SHEET 1 OF 2) Equinix - SE-4-2


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS
POWER GENERATION GROUP

ITEM CPG P/N CPG LEGACY QTY DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER P/N SPECIFICATIONS S.L.
101 A061F494 1 MV SWITCHGEAR SQUARE D
102 A041E508 4 100-C CONTACTOR AB 100-C16EJ10 4 N/O, 0 N/C
103 A006X609 6 RELAY TEST SWITCH ABB 498A010G01
104 A007P022 4 4 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE BELDEN 9418 AS REQUIRED
105 A029N421 2 2 CONDUCTOR SHIELDED CABLE BELDEN 9841 AS REQUIRED
106 A002K938 1 CLASS CC FUSE BUSSMANN LP-CC-1 600VAC
107 A002K940 12 CLASS CC FUSE BUSSMANN LP-CC-8/10 600VAC
108 A002K943 24 CLASS CC FUSE BUSSMANN LP-CC-15 600VAC
109 A002K944 1 CLASS CC FUSE BUSSMANN LP-CC-10 600VAC
110 A002L048 2 CLASS CC FUSE BUSSMANN LP-CC-4 600VAC
111 A005F853 2 MCM3320 CUMMINS 0327-1520-01 FULL FEATURED
112 A005R200 3 LOCKOUT RELAY W/ INDICATOR ELECTROSWITCH 78PA04D-011 MAINTAINED CONTACTS, RED LED INDICATOR
113 A006X492 3 TRIP/CLOSE BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH ELECTROSWITCH 24PB38D 2 N/O, 0 N/C
114 A006X500 3 AUTO/MANUAL MODE SWITCH ELECTROSWITCH 24PB204LC 8 FORM C
115 A002L124 40 FUSE HOLDER GOULD USCC1 600VAC
116 A041G847 1 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MODICON BMXCPS2010 24VDC, 16.8W
117 A041G918 1 4 SLOT BACKPLANE MODICON BMXXBP0400 X-BUS
118 A049K352 2 DISCRETE DC INPUT MODICON BMXDDI1602 24VDC, 16 ISOLATED INPUTS, SINK
119 A052F174 1 REMOTE I/O DROP MODICON BMXCRA31210 ETHERNET REMOTE I/O APPLICATIONS
120 A058A215 1 DISCRETE RELAY OUTPUT MODICON BMXDRA1605 24VDC, 2A, 16 OUTPUTS
121 A002B947 5 SLOTTED WIRING DUCT PANDUIT F1X3LG6/C1LG6 LIGHT GRAY
122 A051F985 2 SLOTTED WIRING DUCT PANDUIT F2X3LG6/C2LG6 LIGHT GRAY
123 A014U125 44 END BRACKET, E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 0800886 GREY
124 A030U529 2 SPACER PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047303 GREY
125 A030U842 6 END PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047293 GREY
126 A030V678 228 TERMINAL BLOCK, UT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044076 GREY
127 A030V680 23 END PLATE, UT 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047028 GREY
128 A034E763 20 TERMINAL STYLE CONTROL RELAY PHOENIX CONTACT 2966171 1 FORM C
129 A034N108 25 TERMINAL BLOCK, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044652 GREY
130 A040L553 2 FL COMSERVER UNI PHOENIX CONTACT 2313452 RS232, RS422, OR RS485 (2 WIRE)
131 A048J015 1 FL SWITCH SFN 16TX PHOENIX CONTACT 2891933 16 RJ45 PORTS
132 A042T589 3 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTIVE RELAY SCHWEITZER 0751A51A1A0X72851630 125VDC CV, 10/100BASE-T
133 A049P148 2 SHIELDED CAT 5e CABLE VENDOR SOURCE CONTROLLED AS REQUIRED
134 A045R449 1 PLUGGABLE TERMINALS WEIDMULLER WDU 1.5/BLZ 5.08 STANDARD PLUG
135 A045R451 1 PLUGGABLE TERMINALS WEIDMULLER WDU 1.5/BLZ 5.08 STANDARD PLUG
136 A045R453 1 PLUGGABLE TERMINALS WEIDMULLER WDU 1.5/BLZ 5.08 SIS
137 A050F648 264 CABLE - 20 AWG SIS
138 A034J559 156 CABLE - 18 AWG SIS
139 A030H628 2946 CABLE - 14 AWG SIS
140 A030H633 252 CABLE - 12 AWG AMBER
141 A003N985 1 LAMP HOUSING (OILTIGHT) IDEC APD199NA30
142 A029J976 3 ARC REDUCTION MAINTENANCE SWITCH KIRK KEY KTPS50310S-B
143 A045R447 1 PLUGGABLE TERMINALS WEIDMULLER

DWG NO.: A002A001 (SHEET 2 OF 2) My Project


CONFIDENTIAL
PROPERTY OF CUMMINS

POWER GENERATION GROUP

PROJECT NAME: Equinix - SE-4-2


ORDER NUMBER: 7384760
PRODUCT NUMBER: DMCDDBABCA0256
ECO LTR. NO. REVISION DWN CKD APVD DATE
PC123838 A 1 PRODUCTION RELEASE, AS-BUILT JG JG JG 23-Jul-19

TITLE: EQUINIX
CREATED: J. GUNDLURI
CHECKED: J. GUNDLURI
APPROVED: J. GUNDLURI
EBOM #: A061A234

(SHEET 1 OF 2)
A058G841 EQUINIX 7371861

ITEM CPG P/N QTY DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER P/N SPECIFICATIONS S.L.
101 A047P012 1 Best Battery Selector X
102 A002A271 4 Blank Door X
103 A004D413 4 Door Latch X
104 A003L123 12 Hinge X
105 A005H313 12 Hinge Pin X
106 A000K776 1 Enclosure X
107 A000K751 1 Sub Panel X
108 A034N108 28 TERMINAL BLOCK, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3044652 GREY
109 A030U529 2 SPACER PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047303 GREY
110 A014U125 2 END BRACKET, E/NS 35 N PHOENIX CONTACT 800886 GREY
111 A030U842 2 END PLATE, UTTB 2,5 PHOENIX CONTACT 3047293 GREY
112 A028Z053 1 POWER SUPPLY, QUINT-PS PHOENIX CONTACT 2866763 INPUT: 120/240VAC X
113 A043H869 1 UIINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY, QUINT-UPS PHOENIX CONTACT 2320225 IQ/SFB TECHNOLOGY X
114 A043K841 1 BATTERY, UPS-BAT/7.2Ah PHOENIX CONTACT 2320319 IQ TECHNOLOGY X
115 A047C626 1 DUAL RECTIFIER IXYS DSEP2X31-12A 1200V X

DMCCDBABBA0188 DMCCDBABBA0188
Appendix E. Recommended Spares List

Table of Contents
Table 30. Recommended Spares List ...................................................................................................... 214

A063J840 (Issue 1) 213 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix E. Recommended Spares List 7-2019

NOTICE
This Recommended Spares List represents service parts generally used for this
product. It is recommended that the DMC8000 serial number be used in conjunction
with this list to assure accuracy.

TABLE 30. RECOMMENDED SPARES LIST

CPG Part
Critical Matrix Description Description
Number
0327-1520-01 A CARD,CONTROL MCM3320
A041G847 A MODULE,POWER SUPPLY 24VDC, 16.8W
A049K352 A MODULE,INPUT X80 16 Input Assembly
A049K356 A MODULE,OUTPUT X80 16 Output Assembly
A048J015 A SWITCH,ETHERNET 16TX, RJ45, 10/100 MBIT, ETHERNET SWITCH
A057A447 A MODULE,OUTPUT X80 16 Point Relay Output Card, 2A, 24VDC
Power Supply
A052F176 A MODULE,TRANSCEIVER Ethernet X80 Remote I/O Applications
A056D408 A MODULE,CENTRAL M580 PLC Hot Standby Central Processing Unit
PROCESSING UNIT (CPU)
A056D422 A MODULE,TRANSCEIVER X80 4-port Ethernet TCP/IP Module,10Base-
T/100Base-TX
A041E508 B CONTACTOR Power Contactor, 4 Normally Open Contacts
A047T119 B SCREEN,TOUCH Touch Monitor, 19"
A062M679 B COMPUTER,INDUSTRIAL IPC, UNO BOX
A048H417 B MODULE RJ45/RJ45 Patch Panel, 1:1, DIN Rail Mound,
w/Ground Link
A048S234 B LIGHT,PANEL Light Kit
A048S237 B SWITCH,LIMIT Door Activated Switch
A049F789 B SWITCH,ETHERNET 14TX/2FX, RJ45/SC 10/100 MBIT, Ethernet
Switch
A049K332 B SWITCH,EMERGENCY STOP EStop Switch Assembly
0307-1821 B RELAY EStop Relay
0323-1410-02 B SOCKET,RELAY EStop Relay Socket
A049W488 B SWITCH,EMERGENCY STOP EStop Assembly with 1NO Contact and 1NC
Contact
A049K339 B RELAY,CONTROL 4 Form C
A034E763 B RELAY,CONTROL 6A, 1 Form C
A034G766 B RELAY,CONTROL 6A, 2 Form C

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 214 A063J840 (Issue 1)


7-2019 Appendix E. Recommended Spares List

CPG Part
Critical Matrix Description Description
Number
A040L553 B CIRCUIT,INTEGRATED RS232, RS422, OR RS485 (2 WIRE)
NETWORK
A047R998 B RACK,CONTROL X80 6-Slot PLC Rack, X-Bus
A056N890 B RACK,CONTROL M580 4-Slot PLC Rack, X-Bus+Ethernet

A063J840 (Issue 1) 215 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix E. Recommended Spares List 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 216 A063J840 (Issue 1)


Appendix F. Vendor Drawings

A063J840 (Issue 1) 217 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix F. Vendor Drawings 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 218 A063J840 (Issue 1)


     

 

( )    '  % &'  ( #  $$&  !"# $  *+

 ,!- .  /  /  '0*!12. 13*103%-*4*5,*5,1005/4,5455


,!11625,!1%*352157,*889/

 :8 8  /  / 7;9 '0*!12. 2171</2*/12%1%9=/555%*16!


=>*/5%%32*.%!/52*%3%%!12/

 :8 8  /  / <7;9 '0*!12. %217%*0142*/12%1%9=3%1<555%*16!


=3%1<>*516620%!/

: ,/ (> / / ,% *31 ,26%>%*(2**5**%),/8 (>5


(057 ,95?,-365,5=3%</
(07*%)/1,</95*83%66!>*20!
12%1%(2*02%616!=3%1<>*5<@

 *  /  / 1% '0*!12. 10**%%*(2**53>6*%3252!6*5


51/

 * / / 1% '0*!12. 10**%%*(2**53>6*%3252!6*5


51/

 6  /  / 6 >*661%*31 0*>**%*53%*!3%165%.A54,5


/ 4,12,/

 ::::8:8 / / ,26%!%1%2* /?,306%2*=1/!3,3!*/

 :::88  /  / ,26%3!31%2* '0*!12. 66363><%<!/%2:/4,7<,6##9,3:

 !88  /  / <* '0*!12. 663<*(2*<,6

 ,% / / 3*6 3*3 3*35,%*353!0%*36>*!3(**!


31%32=3!2=:31<,3=3>!3%*55
:5*%),%8/

 :8 :8  /  / <%*; '0*!12. %*3<%*-6.5:<%*5=B:,15


=3%<%<*2%%!<%*>0*!5*3 ;
*3,*8/

C          6


2  '   *+  2   
  " * 1 &  &1&D #E !#  %::  88-
     

 

( )    '  % &'  ( #  $$&  !"# $  *+

 40A1  /  / 1%- -0 %*36-62145-05<2*%3>%.5-3!*


<!1*=60>7)8 9523%5)8)=3*5 5
,/

: 6- / / %- '0*!12. %*36-621452=*!3%*3-0%32560305


2651F &563798):8562!798):8/

 6-: / / %- '0*!12. %*36-621452=*!3%*3-0%32560305


2651F &563798):8562!7:98):8:/

 -(  /  / (08 -0 (05-(  GA8G55,15(%1%3>/

 -( / / (08 -0 HHH*HHH(05-(  GA8G55,15(%


1%3>/

 /1,</ / / (0 -0 HHH*HHH(05,26%>%*(2**5/5/4,5


%.1,</

  :8: / / =3* '0*!12. 1-65):1=3*5-*3!/

 <0 :: / / 60> -0*!. 60>51*35)10579 G<265-*2=/HH*61%


*%(2*.16:-2AHH

 :8 8  /  / 61/*14. '0*!12. 61%*31*143>!22*!%*-6.5*3/


2*14%-4*!22*

 :88 / / *14%* '0*!12. 2%2**143>!,31-6.

 :8:8 / / %%1- '0*!12. %%1-3%5,1!15!1%*3(2*,*13*103%


-*4*/

: :8:8 / / %%C0* '0*!12. %%C0*5:(%62>(2*,*13*103%-*4*/

 :88 / / >%0 '0*!12. 12%*261-6I62>=3%<0<-0%%2%%32

 :88 / / >%0 '0*!12. 12%*262=*12*!,51.16

C          6


2  '   *+  2   
  " * 1 &  &1&D #E !#  %::  88-
      

 

( )    '  % &'  ( #  $$&  !"# $  *+

 1- / / -%%32 '0*!12. 0<-0%%2%%325 -0%%25(2*13*103%-*4*


12%*265(%/12*!/

 :88 / / >%0 '0*!12. 61%*316>*!/;%%03%5 2*%5


12%1%5*3/

 :88 / / 1*%14 '0*!12. 1*%2143>5*3!22*5123%3>2(8 


;8 06!622*%%>/

  :8 8 / / *14<!6 '0*!12. 13*103%-*4**143><!65%*16!


=3%1<>*/

  8  / / 06 '0*!12. 3%*01%32-066%35%.,*61%*3166.


2*%!>*20!!%%!,31/

  !6  / / 60> 121%2*(>31/ 60>5%1*=560305%.!6579)8 1


6105<267G9!/

   /  / *1 <0--66 *1%165:26=3*>*20!3>55:=3*

C          6


2  '   *+  2   
  " * 1 &  &1&D #E !#  %::  88-
Appendix G. Tests and Settings

A063J840 (Issue 1) 219 Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc.


Appendix G. Tests and Settings 7-2019

This page is intentionally blank.

Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. 220 A063J840 (Issue 1)


DMC 8000
Factory Test
Project Name:
Equinix - SE-4-2
Order #:
7384760
Model #:
DMCDDBABCA0256

Tester/Date:
Engineer/Date:
SUBJECT PAGE NO
Title Page 1
Table of Contents 2
Static Test Hw Setup 4
System Software - HSBY PLC 5
System Software - PRs 8
Information Screen 9
Setup Screen 1 10
Setup Screen 2 11
Setup Screen 3 14
Setup Screen 4 16
Setup Screen 5 17
Setup Screen 6 18
Load Control Level Settings Pg1 19
Load Control Level Settings Pg2 20
Load Demand Settings 21
System Control Settings 22
Report Settings 23
Screen Security and Navigate 24
Oneline Screen 33
Gen Summary Screen 36
AC Metering Screen 42
Trending Screen 43
System Control 1 Screen 47
Load Control Screen Pg1 48
Load Control Screen Pg2 50
Load Demand Screen 52
Event Log Screen 53
Alarm History Screen 56
Scheduler Screen 58
Generator Report Screen 61
Current Alarm Screen P1 63
Current Alarm Screen P2 64
Security Pop Up Screen 68
Setup Popup Email-SMTP Screen 70
Hardware Switches and Lights 71
Island Link Failure Tests 72
Trans Type Man Gen Control 75
Load Manual EODO-EOFM Test 79
Sequence Test Setup 83
OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail 84
OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A 95
OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B 103
OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A 111
OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B 118
Utility Fail LAS Priority 123
Test LAS Priority 134
LB Test 144
Paralleling Temp Gen Test 146
Load Demand Test 147
PLC Failure Tests 149
Scheduler Test 152
Hot Standby Tests 155
Reporting Test 157
Static Test Completion 158
ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Static Test Hw Setup
Static Test Hw Setup
The following procedures should be performed by the tester to verify the DMC and
switchgear functionality. P

Breaker Charge, Close and Open procedure (execute for all breakers in system)
Charge breaker via the charging handle P
Press the close button P
Breaker closes P
Press the open button P
Breaker Opens P

Static
Breaker Charge, Close and Open executed for all breakers in system P

Static
All interconnect wires for Static Test are wired and ready for test P

Static
Station Battery installed and fuses installed P

Static
Genset simulators loaded with static test capture file P

Revision: 1 Page 4 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Software - HSBY PLC
This software should be programmed by the software engineer
PLC Software/Firmware Versions

PLC CPU Firmware 2.2

PLC Copro Firmware NA

NOE Firmware 2.07

CRP Firmware 2.18


PLC Program Template Name
(*.sta) Template_M580_HSBY.sta
PLC Program Template Version
Number Ver 8

PLC Program File Name (*.sta)

PLC Program File Build # 220

PLC Unity Version 11

DIO Software

Firmware on Each CRA drop 2.18

Comm Server Software

Firmware on Each Phoenix Uni Default

MCM Software

Firmware on Each MCM 2.04

Capture File Name on each MCM MCM3320_Steelhead_Defaults.cap


Capture File Version on each
MCM 6

Revision: 1 Page 5 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Software - HSBY PLC
HMI Software

Indusoft Project File Name (*.zip)

Indusoft Project Template Name Template Dual Transfer Pair


Indusoft Project Template
Revision 60

Indusoft Version 7.1

PLC Firmware Checklist

PLC Rack and Slot


PLC Panel Tag Name (e.g. "R1A/S1", Firmware Update
(e.g. "AZ502") R1B/S1) Complete
CPU R1A/S0
NOC R1A/S2

CRA Drop Check Off List

Firmware Update
CRA drop Network 1 Complete
2 P
3 P
4 P
5 P
6 P
7 P
8 P
9 P
10 P
13 P

Revision: 1 Page 6 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Software - HSBY PLC
MCM Firmware and Capture File Checklist

MCM Component Capture File


MCM Panel Tag Name Tag Name Firmware Update Download
(e.g. "AZ502") (e.g. "M:A601") Complete Complete
DMCA P P P
DMCB P P P

UNI Firmware and Setup Checklist

UNI Component
UNI Panel Tag Name Tag Name Firmware Update Uni Setup
(e.g. "AZ502") (e.g. "M:A601") Complete Complete
DMCA P P P
DMCB P P P

Revision: 1 Page 7 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Software - PRs
This software should be programmed by the software engineer

For each protective relay that is programmed, use the programming software to ensure
the lockout trip contact opens the breaker when commanded from the protective relay.

Protective Relay Settings

Programmed

Lockout Trip
Test Pass
Settings
Relay Type (e.g. Relay Settings Filename 2 (e.g.
Load CBs SEL751, SEL351) Main, Feeder)
52-TA SEL751A 52-TA P P
52-TB SEL751A 52-TB P P
52-TG/LB SEL751A 52-TG/LB P P

Revision: 1 Page 8 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Information Screen

These settings should be entered on the Information Screen of the HMI

Information Screen Data Static Static Ship

Project Name Equinix- SE-4-2 P P

Model Number DMCDDBABCA0256 P P

Order Number 7384760 P P

Distributor Name Cummins Pacific P P

Phone Number 7635745000 P P

Revision: 1 Page 9 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 1
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Generator Settings

Genset Generator Generator CB Node Connect to Static


Number Name Name kW Rating PCC Type Address Bus Static Ship

1 Gen 1A 52-G1A 2000 2 99 1 P P

2 Gen 2A 52-G2A 2000 2 99 1 P P

3 Gen 3A 52-G3A 2000 2 99 1 P P

4 Gen 4A 52-G4A 2000 2 99 1 P P

5 Gen 1B 52-G1B 2000 2 99 2 P P

6 Gen 2B 52-G2B 2000 2 99 2 P P

7 Gen 3B 52-G3B 2000 2 99 2 P P

8 Gen 4B 52-G4B 2000 2 99 2 P P

9 TG 52-TG/LB 2000 2 99 3 P P

Generator Gauge Settings

Gauge Min Value Max Value Static Static Ship

Average
Voltage (L-L) 0 13500 P P
Average
Current 0 150 P P
Real Power 0 2000 P P
*Same as *Same as
Frequency Meter Min Meter Max P P
Oil Pressure 0 80 P P

Coolant
Temperature 0 250 P P

Engine Speed 0 2000 P P


Battery
Voltage 0 30 P P

Revision: 1 Page 10 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 2
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Meter 0 Static Static Ship

Enabled Checked P P

Meter Name GMA Meter P P

Nominal Voltage L-L 13200 P P

Connection (Delta or Wye) Delta P P

PT Primary 13200 P P

PT Secondary 120 P P

CT Primary 600 P P

CT Secondary 5 P P

Unload kW 50 P P

System Frequency 60 P P

Meter 1 Static Static Ship

Enabled Checked P P

Meter Name UTA Meter P P

Nominal Voltage L-L 13200 P P

Connection (Delta or Wye) Delta P P

PT Primary 13200 P P

PT Secondary 120 P P

CT Primary 600 P P

CT Secondary 5 P P

Unload kW 50 P P

System Frequency 60 P P

Revision: 1 Page 11 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 2
Meter 2 Static Static Ship

Enabled Checked P P

Meter Name GMB Meter P P

Nominal Voltage L-L 13200 P P

Connection (Delta or Wye) Delta P P

PT Primary 13200 P P

PT Secondary 120 P P

CT Primary 600 P P

CT Secondary 5 P P

Unload kW 50 P P

System Frequency 60 P P

Meter 3 Static Static Ship

Enabled Checked P P

Meter Name UTB Meter P P

Nominal Voltage L-L 13200 P P

Connection (Delta or Wye) Delta P P

PT Primary 13200 P P

PT Secondary 120 P P

CT Primary 600 P P

CT Secondary 5 P P

Unload kW 50 P P

System Frequency 60 P P

Revision: 1 Page 12 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 2

Meter Gauge Settings Static Static Ship


Gauge Min Value Max Value P P

Average Voltage L-L 0 13500 P P

Average Current 0 1000 P P

Real Power 0 2500 P P

Frequency 45 65 P P

Revision: 1 Page 13 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 3
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Generator Main 1 Settings Static Static Ship

GM Name 52-GMA P P

Generator Main 2 Settings Static Static Ship

GM Name 52-GMB P P

Utility and Utility Main 1 Settings Static Static Ship

Utility Name Utility 1 P P

Utility Fail Delay 0s P P

UM Name 52-UTA P P

Utility and Utility Main 2 Settings Static Static Ship

Utility Name Utility 2 P P

Utility Fail Delay 0s P P

UM Name 52-UTB P P

Genbus Tie 1 Settings Static Static Ship

Tie Name 52-TA P P

Genbus Tie 2 Settings Static Static Ship

Tie Name 52-TB P P

Time Setup Static Static Ship


System Date and Time set to
current time P P
PLC Date and Time report the
same data (within +-5
seconds) P P

Revision: 1 Page 14 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 3
System Settings Static Static Ship

Max Ramp Time 20s P P


Authorized Return to utility
Required unckecked P P

Revision: 1 Page 15 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 4
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Load Add/Shed Settings Static Static Ship

Genbus Add Delay 3 P P

Utility Bus Add Delay 2 P P

Load Shed Delay 2 P P

Quick Shed Enable Checked P P


Custom Load Shed
Level Assignment Off P P

Loadbus 1
Load Add/Shed Settings

Load Number Load Type Oneline Name Load Control Name Static Static Ship

1 EO/DO 52-F1A 52-F1A P P

2 EO/DO 52-F2A 52-F2A P P

3 EO/DO 52-F3A 52-F3A P P

4 EO/DO 52-F4A 52-F4A P P

5 FUTURE P P

6 FUTURE P P

7 FUTURE P P

8 FUTURE P P

Revision: 1 Page 16 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 5
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Load Add/Shed Settings Static Static Ship
Required Online
Capacity, loadbus 1 4800 P P
Required Online
Capacity, loadbus 2 4800 P P

Min. Capacity To Connect Static Static Ship

Loadbus 1 Capacity 4800 P P

Loadbus 1 Time Out 45s P P

Loadbus 2 Capacity 4800 P P

Loadbus 2 Time Out 45s P P

Loadbus 2
Load Add/Shed Settings

Load Number Load Type Oneline Name Load Control Name Static Static Ship

1 EO/DO 52-F1B 52-F1B P P

2 EO/DO 52-F2B 52-F2B P P

3 EO/DO 52-F3B 52-F3B P P

4 EO/DO 52-F4B 52-F4B P P

5 FUTURE P P

6 FUTURE P P

7 FUTURE P P

8 FUTURE P P

Revision: 1 Page 17 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Screen 6
These settings should be entered on the SETUP SCREEN of the HMI
Control Mode Switch Static Static Ship

Control Mode Switch Load Bank P P

Control Mode Switch Temp Gen Paralleling Mode P P

Load Bank 1 Setting Static Static Ship

LB/TG Name 52-TG/LB P P

LV Main Name 52-LV Main P P

LV LB Name 52-LV LB P P

LV UPS Name 52-LV UPS P P

LV TG Name 52-LV TG P P

Transformer Ratio 13200:480 P P

Future Unchecked P P

Revision: 1 Page 18 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Level Settings Pg1

These settings should be entered on the LOAD CONTROL SCREEN of the HMI
Load Level Assignment
Loadbus 1

Load Add Level Load Shed Level


Load Number Load Name Assignment Assignment Static Static Ship

1 52-F1A 1 0 P P

2 52-F2A 2 3 P P

3 52-F3A 3 2 P P

4 52-F4A 4 1 P P

5 0 0 P P

6 0 0 P P

7 0 0 P P

8 0 0 P P

Revision: 1 Page 19 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Level Settings Pg2

These settings should be entered on the LOAD CONTROL SCREEN of the HMI
Load Level Assignment
Loadbus 2

Load Add Level Load Shed Level


Load Number Load Name Assignment Assignment Static Static Ship

1 52-F1B 1 0 P P

2 52-F2B 2 3 P P

3 52-F3B 3 2 P P

4 52-F4B 4 1 P P

5 0 0 P P

6 0 0 P P

7 0 0 P P

8 0 0 P P

Revision: 1 Page 20 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Demand Settings

These settings should be entered on the LOAD DEMAND SCREEN of the HMI

Load Demand Settings Static Static Ship


Load Demand Enable (On or Off) On P P
Load Demand Setpoints (% or Kw) % P P
Shutdown %kW 60 P P
Restart %kW 80 P P
Initial Delay (min) 1 P P
Shutdown Delay (min) 1 P P
Restart Delay (sec) 5 P P

Run Hour Differential (Hr) (editable only by Run hours selected) 100 P P
Spare Capacity Pick Up (kW) 100 P P

Load Demand Settings kW Static Static Ship


Load Demand Setpoints (% or Kw) kW P
Shutdown kW 50 P P
Restart kW 25 P P

Load Demand Sequence Static Static Ship


User Defined Selected P P
Run Hours Off P P
Auto Rotate Off P P
Lead 1 P P
B 2 P P
C 3 P P
D 4 P P
E 5 P P
F 6 P P
G 7 P P
H 8 P P
I 9 P P

Revision: 1 Page 21 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Control Settings

These settings should be entered on the System Control Screen of the HMI

Loadbus 1 Time Delay Settings - On Sys Control Page 1 Static Static Ship
Program Transition Delay 6s P
Transfer Delay 5s P
Retransfer Delay 1 min P

Loadbus 2 Time Delay Settings - On Sys Control Page 1 Static Static Ship
Program Transition Delay 6s P
Transfer Delay 5s P
Retransfer Delay 1 min P

Revision: 1 Page 22 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Report Settings
These settings should be entered on the Generator Report Screen of the HMI

Report Settings Static Static Ship


Enable On P
Sample Rate 5 P
Minimum Load %kW 80 P
Enable Off P

These settings should be entered on the Run Report Screen of the HMI

Report Settings Static Static Ship


Enable On P
Enable Off P

These settings should be entered on the ATS Report Screen of the HMI

Report Settings Static Static Ship


Enable On NA
Enable Off NA

Revision: 1 Page 23 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
Header Screen Transitions
(Oneline)
Current Alarm P NA P NA P NA P
Info P NA P NA P NA P
Security Login P NA P NA P NA P
Setup NA P NA P P NA P

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Navigations Bar Screen


Transitions
Oneline P NA P NA P NA P
Generator Summary P NA P NA P NA P
AC Metering P NA P NA P NA P
Trending P NA P NA P NA P
System Control NA P P NA P NA P
Load Control NA P P NA P NA P
Load Demand NA P P NA P NA P
Event Log P NA P NA P NA P
Alarm History P NA P NA P NA P
Scheduler NA P P NA P NA P
Generator Report NA P P NA P NA P
Run Report NA P P NA P NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Oneline Screen Transitions


Help Screen Specific to
Oneline P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Utility1 to UTA
metering screen P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Bus 1 to GM1A
metering screen P NA P NA P NA P

Revision: A Page 24 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation
Touch Utility2 to UTB
metering screen P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Bus 2 to GMB
metering screen P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 1A P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 2A P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 3A P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 4A P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 1B P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 2B P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 3B P NA P NA P NA P
Touch Genset to Summary
Gen 4B P NA P NA P NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Oneline Screen Transitions


Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F1A NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F2A NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F3A NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F4A NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F1B NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F2B NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F3B NA P P NA P NA P
Touch Load to Manual
Control Load 52-F4B NA P P NA P NA P

Revision: A Page 25 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
Oneline Operations

Authorized Return Pop Up NA P P NA P NA P


Authorized Return Start NA NA P NA P NA P
Authorized Return Stop NA NA P NA P NA P
Bypass Retransfer Pop Up NA P P NA P NA P

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Gen Summary Transitions


Help Screen Specific to Gen
Summary P NA P NA P NA P
Genset Gauges (small) P NA P NA P NA P
Large Real Power Gauge P NA P NA P NA P
Large Average Voltage L-L
Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Large Average Current Gauge P NA P NA P NA P


Large Frequency Gauge P NA P NA P NA P
Large Oil Pressure Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Large Coolant Temp Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Large Engine Speed Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Large Battery Voltage Gauge P NA P NA P NA P


Flyout to Genset Control NA P P NA P NA P
Genset Select Menu P NA P NA P NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

AC Metering Transitions

Revision: A Page 26 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation
Help Screen Specific to AC
Metering P NA P NA P NA P

Large Average Voltage Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Large Average Current Gauge P NA P NA P NA P


Large Real Power Gauge P NA P NA P NA P
Large Frequency Gauge P NA P NA P NA P

Flyout to Reset kWh/kVarh NA P P NA P NA P

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Trending Transitions
Help Screen Specific to
Trending P NA P NA P NA P
Trend Legend (must have 2
pens active) P NA P NA P NA P
Flyout to Trend Control P NA P NA P NA P
Add Gen Pen P NA P NA P NA P
Add Meter Pen P NA P NA P NA P
Pause / Resume Trend P NA P NA P NA P

Save Trend / Export Button NA P P NA P NA P


Print Button NA P P NA P NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

System Control Transitions


Page 1
Help Screen Specific to
System Control Page 1 NA NA P NA P NA P
Tools (Diagnostics) NA NA NA P NA NA P

Revision: A Page 27 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
Load Control Transitions
Help Screen Specific to Load
Control NA NA P NA P NA P
Load Demand Transitions
Help Screen Specific to Load
Demand NA NA P NA P NA P
Event Log Transitions
Help Screen Specific to Event
Log P NA P NA P NA P
Flyout to Event Controls NA P P NA P NA P
Flyout to Delete Events NA P NA P P NA P
Alarm History Transitions
Help Screen Specific to Alarm
History P NA P NA P NA P
Flyout to Alarm Controls NA P P NA P NA P
Delete Alarm History NA P NA P P NA P
Scheduler Transitions
Help Screen Specific to
Scheduler NA NA P NA P NA P

Revision: A Page 28 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation
Generator Report
Transitions
Help Screen Specific to
Generator Report NA NA P NA P NA P
Generator Report Delete
Report NA NA NA P P NA P

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Security Popup Transitions


Help Screen Specific to
security P NA P NA P NA P
Current User Password
Change NA P P NA P NA P
Add New User NA P NA P P NA P
Delete User NA P NA P P NA P
Auto Logout NA P NA P P NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

Setup Popup Transitions


Help Screen Specific to setup
popup NA NA NA NA P NA P
Set Email Addresses NA NA NA NA P NA P

Help screen for email


addresses specific to email NA NA NA NA P NA P
Set SMTP NA NA NA NA P NA P
Help screen for SMTP specific
to SMTP NA NA NA NA P NA P
System Settings NA NA NA NA NA P P

Revision: A Page 29 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
System Setup Screen
Transitions Page 1
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 2 via
button 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 3 via
button 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 4 via
button 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 5 via
button 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 6 via
button 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Tools (Diagnostics) NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

System Setup Screen


Transitions Page 2
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 1 via
button 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 3 via
button 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 4 via
button 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 5 via
button 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 6 via
button 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P

Revision: A Page 30 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
System Setup Screen
Transitions Page 3
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 1 via
button 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 2 via
button 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 4 via
button 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 5 via
button 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 6 via
button 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Set Time NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

System Setup Screen


Transitions Page 4
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 1 via
button 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 2 via
button 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 3 via
button 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 5 via
button 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 6 via
button 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P

Revision: A Page 31 of 159


ORDER NO: 7360386 Equinix - DE2 15262
TEST FORMS: Screen Security and Navigation

Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed
System Setup Screen
Transitions Page 5
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 1 via
button 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 2 via
button 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 3 via
button 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 4 via
button 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 6 via
button 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Operator Not Allowed

Manager Not Allowed

Technician Allowed
Guest Not Allowed

Operator Allowed

Manager Allowed
Guest Allowed

System Setup Screen


Transitions Page 6
Help Screen Specific to
system setup page 6 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 1 via
button 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 2 via
button 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 3 via
button 3 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 4 via
button 4 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Transition to page 5 via
button 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Right Swipe to page 1 NA NA NA NA NA NA P
Left Swipe to page 5 NA NA NA NA NA NA P

Revision: A Page 32 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Oneline Screen

Note: This test should be performed in parallel with "Gen Summary Screen" and "Trans Type Man
Gen Ctrl" to exercise the Gen in manual, initiate a test, and clear a fault.

Load Demand Shutdown


Cooldown at Rated

Cooldown at Idle

Warning/Derate
Genset Running

Warmup at Idle
Genset Name

Start Pending

Running
Manual
Auto
Genset Symbol
Gen 1A P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P P P P P P P
CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

Load Side Hot


CB Unknown
CB Earthed
CB Closed
CB Name

CB Open

CB Fail
kW

Genset CB
52-G1A P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G2A P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G3A P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G4A P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G1B P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G2B P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G3B P P P P P P NA P P P
52-G4B P P P P P P NA P P P
CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

Load Side Hot


CB Unknown
CB Earthed
CB Closed
CB Name

CB Open

CB Fail
kW

LV CB
52-LV MAIN P NA P P P P NA NA P P
52-LV LB P NA P P P P NA NA P P
52-LV UPS P NA P P P P NA NA P P
52-LV TG P NA P P P P NA NA P P
52-TG P NA P P P P NA NA P P

Revision: 1 Page 33 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Oneline Screen

Cold

Unk
Hot
Bus States
Genbus 1 P P P
Genbus 2 P P P
Genbus 3 P P P
Loadbus1 P P P
Loadbus2 P P P

CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

Load Side Hot


CB Earthed
Shed Level

CB Control
CB Closed
Add Level
CB Name

CB Open

Manual

CB Fail
Load Bus 1 CB Loads
52-F1A P P P P P P P NA P P P NA
52-F2A P P P P P P P NA P P P NA
52-F3A P P P P P P P NA P P P NA
52-F4A P P P P P P P NA P P P NA

CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

Load Side Hot


CB Earthed
Shed Level

CB Control
CB Closed
Add Level
CB Name

CB Open

Manual

CB Fail
Load Bus 2 CB Loads
52-F1B P P P P P P NA NA P P P NA
52-F2B P P P P P P NA NA P P P NA
52-F3B P P P P P P NA NA P P P NA
52-F4B P P P P P P NA NA P P P NA
CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

CB Unexpected

Synchronizing
Load Side Hot
CB Earthed
CB Closed
CB Name

CB Open
Voltage

Manual

CB Fail
kW

Main CB
52-GMA P P P NA P P P NA P P P P NA
52-UTA P P NA NA P P P NA P P P P NA
52-GMB P P P NA P P P NA P P P P NA
52-UTB P P NA NA P P P NA P P P P NA
Authorized Indicator
Waiting Indicator

Return Start

Return Stop

Authorized Return to
Utility

Revision: 1 Page 34 of 159


TG
TG
Utility 2
Utility 1
Utility 2
Utility 1

Genset CB

Revision: 1
Retransfer

52-TG/LB
Genset Symbol
ORDER NO: 7384760

Load Bus 1 CB Loads


P
P
P
P
P
P
P

CB Line Side Hot CB Name Genset Name Retransfer Timing

P
P
P
P
P
P
P

CB Open kW Genset Running Retransfer Delay value

P
P
P
P
P
P
P

CB Closed CB Line Side Hot Auto Bypass Confirm

P
P
P
P
P
P
P

CB Disconnected CB Open Manual Bypass Cancel

P
P
CB Closed Start Pending

NA
CB Earthed

P
P
CB Load Side Hot CB Disconnected

NA
Warmup at Idle

P
P
Manual Running

NA
CB Earthed
Equinix - SE-4-2

P
P
P
CB Failure CB Unknown Cooldown at Rated
TEST FORMS: Oneline Screen

P
P
P
CB Manual Control CB Load Side Hot Cooldown at Idle

P
P
P

CB Failure Load Demand Shutdown

P
P

Warning/Derate

Page 35 of 159
ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Note: This test should be performed in parallel with "Oneline Screen" and "Trans Type Man Gen Ctrl" to
exercise the Gen in manual,initiate a test, and clear a fault.

Load Demand Shutdown


Cooldown at Rated

Warning/Derate
Genset Running
Genset Name

Start Pending

Running
Manual
Auto
Genset Symbol
Gen 1A P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P P P P P
TG P P P P P P P P P
CB Disconnected
CB Line Side Hot

Load Side Hot


Genset Name

CB Unknown

NEC Closed
CB Earthed

NEC Open
CB Closed

NEC FAIL
CB Open

CB Fail

Genset CB
52-G1A P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G2A P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G3A P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G4A P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G1B P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G2B P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G3B P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-G4B P P P P P NA P P P NA NA NA
52-TG P P P P NA NA P P P NA NA NA

Revision: 1 Page 36 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Genset Reset
Genset Start

Genset Stop

CB Open
CB Close
Gen Summary
Control
Gen 1A P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P
TG P P P P P
Selectable

Units
US Imperial P
Metric P
Bus Volt L-N (L1)

Bus Volt L-N (L2)

Bus Volt L-N (L3)


Bus Volt L-L (L1)

Bus Volt L-L (L2)

Bus Volt L-L (L3)

Bus Frequency

Bus Data
Gen 1A P P P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P P P
TG P P P P P P P

Revision: 1 Page 37 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Engine Runtime
Coolant Temp

No. of Starts
Oil Pressure
Engine RPM

DC Voltage

Total Fuel
Fuel Rate
kWH
Engine Data
Gen 1A P P P P P P P * *
Gen 2A P P P P P P P * *
Gen 3A P P P P P P P * *
Gen 4A P P P P P P P * *
Gen 1B P P P P P P P * *
Gen 2B P P P P P P P * *
Gen 3B P P P P P P P * *
Gen 4B P P P P P P P * *
TG P P P P P P P * *
Voltage L-N (L1)

Voltage L-N (L2)

Voltage L-N (L3)


Voltage L-L (L1)

Voltage L-L (L2)

Voltage L-L (L3)

Power Factor
Current (L1)

Current (L2)

Current (L3)

Frequency

kVAR
%kW

kVA
kW
Alternator Data
Gen 1A P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
TG P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P

Revision: 1 Page 38 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Genset Supplying Load

Pre High Engine Temp.


High Battery Voltage

Pre Low Oil Pressure


Low Battery Voltage

High Engine Temp.


Low Coolant Temp
Charger AC Failure

Low Coolant Level


Low Oil Pressure
Genset Running
Common Alarm

Low Fuel Level


Failed to Start
Not in Auto

Overspeed
Annunciation
Gen 1A P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 2A P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 3A P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 4A P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 1B P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 2B P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 3B P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Gen 4B P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
TG P P P P NA NA NA P P P P P P P * *
Actual Value (needle & box)
Max Value from Settings
Min Value from Settings

Transfer to 4" Gauge

Small Gauges
Unit

(Gen 1 Only)
Real Power P P P P P
Average
Voltage P P P P P
Average
Current P P P P P
Frequency P P P P P
Oil Pressure P P P P P
Coolant Temp P P P P P
Engine Speed P P P P P

Battery Voltage P P P P P

Revision: 1 Page 39 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Actual Value (needle & box)


Max Value from Settings
Min Value from Settings
4 " Gauges

Unit
(Gen 1 Only)
Real Power P P P P
Average
Voltage P P P P
Average
Current P P P P
Frequency P P P P
Oil Pressure P P P P
Coolant Temp P P P P
Engine Speed P P P P

Battery Voltage P P P P
Change to Coolant Temp via button 6

Change to Battery Voltage via button


Change to Engine Speed via button 7
Change to Oil Pressure via button 5
Change to Avg Voltage via button 2

Change to Avg Current via button 3


Change to Real Power via button 1

Change to Frequency via button 4

Right Swipe
Left Swipe

4 " Gauges
(Gen 1 Only)
8

Real Power NA P P P P P P P P P
Average
Voltage P NA P P P P P P P P
Average
Current P P NA P P P P P P P
Frequency P P P NA P P P P P P
Oil Pressure P P P P NA P P P P P
Coolant Temp P P P P P NA P P P P
Engine Speed P P P P P P NA P P P

Battery Voltage P P P P P P P NA P P

Revision: 1 Page 40 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Gen Summary Screen

Real Power Actual Value (needle & box)

Average Current (needle & box)

Gauge Index
Check
Gen 2A P P
Gen 3A P P
Gen 4A P P
Gen 1B P P
Gen 2B P P
Gen 3B P P
Gen 4B P P
TG P P

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 41 of 159


Power

Energy

Revision: 1
UTB Meter
UTB Meter
UTB Meter
UTB Meter

UTA Meter
UTA Meter
UTA Meter
UTA Meter

GMB Meter
GMB Meter
GMB Meter
GMB Meter

GMA Meter
GMA Meter
GMA Meter
GMA Meter

Control - Flyout
Voltage / Current
ORDER NO: 7384760

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

Reset Hours kW Hours (+) Real Power (Total) Voltage L-L (Avg)

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

kVAR Hours (+) Real Power (L1) Voltage L-L (L1)

NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

kW Hours (-) Real Power (L2) Voltage L-L (L2)

NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

kW Hours (-) Real Power (L3) Voltage L-L (L3)

NA
NA
NA
NA
P
P
Reactive Power (Total) Voltage L-N (Avg)

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Equinix - SE-4-2

P
P Reactive Power (L1) Voltage L-N (L1)

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P

Reactive Power (L2) Voltage L-N (L2)


NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
TEST FORMS: AC Metering Screen

P
P

Reactive Power (L3) Voltage L-N (L3)


NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P

Apparent Power (Total) Current (Avg)


NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P

Apparent Power (L1) Current (L1)


NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P

Apparent Power (L2) Current (L2)


NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P

Apparent Power (L3) Current (L3)


NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
P
P

Power Factor Frequency


NA
NA

Page 42 of 159
ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trending Screen

Verify Highlight
Trend Flyout -

Selectable
Add Genset

Name
Pen, Genset
Menu
Gen 1A * * *
Gen 2A * * *
Gen 3A * * *
Gen 4A * * *
Gen 1B * * *
Gen 2B * * *
Gen 3B * * *
Gen 4B * * *
TG * * *
Average Voltage LN
Average Voltage LL

Trend Flyout -
Average Current

Battery Voltage
Add Genset

Coolant Temp
Power Factor

Oil Pressure

Engine RPM
Pen Selection,
Percent kW

Frequency

Fuel Rate
Oil Temp
Pen adds with
scale (8 max)
kVAR

kVA
kW

for Gen 1
Pen Min P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Pen Max P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Verify Highlight

Trend Flyout -
Add AC
Select
Name

Metering Pen,
Meter Menu
Genbus * * *
Average Voltage LN
Average Voltage LL

Trend Flyout -
Average Current

Add AC
Power Factor

Metering Pen,
Frequency

Pen add with


scale (8 max)
kVAR

kVA
kW

for GM Meter
Pen Min P P P P P P P P
Pen Max P P P P P P P P

Revision: 1 Page 43 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trending Screen

Average Voltage LN
Average Voltage LL
Trend Flyout -

Average Current
Add AC

Power Factor
Metering Pen,

Frequency
Pen add with
scale (8 max)

kVAR

kVA
kW
for UM Meter
Pen Min P P NA NA NA NA P NA
Pen Max P P NA NA NA NA P NA
Selection available

Data Export -
Gensets
From Date *
To Date *

Data Export -
Gensets
(Insert usb
and confirm
USB Not Available

ability to
export, as
Pass Msg

well as fail
when not
connected)

Export to USB * *
Eject USB * *
Selection available

Data Export -
Meters
From Date *
To Date *

Revision: 1 Page 44 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trending Screen
Data Export -
Meters (Insert
usb and
confirm

USB Not Available


ability to
export, as
Pass Msg
well as fail
when not
connected)

Export to USB * *
Eject USB * *
Edit Genset Pen min/max

Edit Meter Pen min/max

Edit ATS Pen


Pen Name

Pen Color

Remove

Scale

Pen Selections
Pen 1 P P P P P P P
Pen 2 P P P P P P P
Pen 3 P P P P P P P
Pen 4 P P P P P P P
Pen 5 P P P P P P P
Pen 6 P P P P P P P
Pen 7 P P P P P P P
Pen 8 P P P P P P P
Selection available

Trend Flyout
Print NA
Trend Run P
Trend Pause P

Revision: 1 Page 45 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trending Screen

Reduce 10 Min Hold -


Reduce 1 Min single -
Add 10 Min Hold +
Add 1 Min single +

Restore Default
Trend Flyout
Duration
while running
Trend
Duration
Running P P P P P

Reduce 10 Min Hold -


Reduce 1 Min single -
Add 10 Min Hold +
Add 1 Min single +
Previous Month
Edit Selectable

Day Selection
Next Month

Year Entry

Trend Flyout
while paused
Start Time P P P P NA P P P P
End Time P P P P NA P P P P

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 46 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: System Control 1 Screen

Selection available
Transition Type
Auto Open Transition P
Manual P

Selection available

System Mode -
Off - Always enabled P
Test without Load P
Test with Load P
Selection available

Control Selection
Operator P
Hardwired Inputs P
Scheduler P
Adjustable

Loadbus 1 Time Delays


Program Transition Time
Delay P
Transfer Delay P
Retransfer Delay P
Adjustable

Loadbus 2 Time Delays


Program Transition Time
Delay P
Transfer Delay P
Retransfer Delay P

Revision: 1 Page 47 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Screen Pg1

Capacity

Spare
Load

Unit
System Summary
Power P P P kW
Current P P P A

Bounds Checked
Load Add level Assignment

Max
Min
(pop up screen ranges)
Add Level 0 8 P
Shed Level 0 7 P
Load Name

Load Level and Name


Shed
Add

Assignment
52-F1A P P P
52-F2A P P P
52-F3A P P P
52-F4A P P P

Revision: 1 Page 48 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Screen Pg1

"Restore" Pushbutton
"Shed" Pushbutton
"Add" Pushbutton

Shed Level "Shed"


Add Level Status

Shed Level "OK"


Add / Shed Level Buttons
and indicators
Level 1 P NA P P P P
Level 2 P P P P P P
Level 3 P P P P P P
Level 4 P P P P P P
Level 5 P P P P P P
Level 6 P P P P P P
Level 7 P P P P P P
Level 8 P P NA NA NA NA
Indicator and Enabled

Load Control Save


Adjustments
Modified Indication P
Save P
Cancel P
Pass Indication P
Fail Indication P

Revision: 1 Page 49 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Screen Pg2

Capacity

Spare
Load

Unit
System Summary
Power P P P kW
Current P P P A

Bounds Checked
Load Add level Assignment

Max
Min
(pop up screen ranges)
Add Level 0 8 P
Shed Level 0 7 P
Load Name

Load Level and Name


Shed
Add

Assignment
52-F1B P P P
52-F2B P P P
52-F3B P P P
52-F4B P P P

Revision: 1 Page 50 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Control Screen Pg2

"Restore" Pushbutton
"Shed" Pushbutton
"Add" Pushbutton

Shed Level "Shed"


Add Level Status

Shed Level "OK"


Add / Shed Level Buttons
and indicators
Level 1 P NA P P P P
Level 2 P P P P P P
Level 3 P P P P P P
Level 4 P P P P P P
Level 5 P P P P P P
Level 6 P P P P P P
Level 7 P P P P P P
Level 8 P P NA NA NA NA
Indicator and Enabled

Load Control Save


Adjustments
Modified Indication P
Save P
Cancel P
Pass Indication P
Fail Indication P

Revision: 1 Page 51 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Demand Screen

Adjustable
Load Demand Sequence
Genset Number
Lead P
B P
C P
D P
E P
F P
G P
I P
H P
Indicator and Enabled

Load Demand Save


Adjustments
Modified Indication P
Save P
Cancel P
Pass Indication P
Fail Indication P

Revision: 1 Page 52 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Event Log Screen

Adjustable
Display Events - Flyout
From Date *
To Date *

Bounds Check
Max
Min
Calendar Date Selection
Year * * *

September

November

December
February

October
January

August
March

April

June
May

July
Calendar Month Selection
Next * * * * * * * * * * * *
Previous * * * * * * * * * * * *

Calendar Day Selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


* * * * * * *
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
* * * * * * *
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
* * * * * * *
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
* * * * * * *
29 30 31
* * *
Selectable

Calendar Confirmation
Confirm Selection *
Cancel Selection *

Revision: 1 Page 53 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Event Log Screen

Selectable
Event Filters
System *
Genset *
Load *
None *

Operable

Event Log Print / Delete


Print NA
Delete History P
Entry exist s

System Events Recorded in


event log

System Manual Mode Active P


System in Auto-Open
Transition P
System Mode Off P

System in Test without Load P


System in Test with Load P

System in Extended Parallel NA


Load Demand Enabled /
Disabled P
Alarm Silence Pushbutton
Active P
Operator Control Enabled P
Hardwired Inputs Control
Enabled P

Scheduler Control Enabled P


Utility 1 Failure P
Utility 1 Return P
Utility 2 Failure P
Utility 2 Return P

Revision: 1 Page 54 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Event Log Screen

Cooldown as Rated

Cooldown at Idle

CB Disconnected
Warmup at Idle

Ready to Load
Genset Name

Start Pending

CB Earthed
CB Closed
CB Open
Stopped
Genset Events Recorded in
event log
Gen 1A P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 2A P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 3A P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 4A P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 1B P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 2B P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 3B P P P P P * * P P P NA
Gen 4B P P P P P * * P P P NA
TG P P P P P * * P P NA NA
Disconnected
Load Name

Earthed
Closed

Load Events Recorded in


Open

event log
52-F1A P P P NA NA
52-F2A P P P NA NA
52-F3A P P P NA NA
52-F4A P P P NA NA
52-F1B P P P NA NA
52-F2B P P P NA NA
52-F3B P P P NA NA
52-F4B P P P NA NA
Disconnected
Unknown
CB Name

Earthed
Closed

Main CB Events Recorded in


Open

event log
52-GMA P P P P P NA
52-UTA P P P P P NA
52-GMB P P P P P NA
52-UTB P P P P P NA

Revision: 1 Page 55 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Alarm History Screen

Adjustable
Display Alarms - Flyout
From Date *
To Date *

Adjustable
Display Alarms - Flyout,
Calendar Date Selection
Year *

September

November

December
February

October
January

August
March

April

June
May

July
Calendar Month Selection
Next * * * * * * * * * * * *
Previous * * * * * * * * * * * *

Calendar Day Selection 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


* * * * * * *
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
* * * * * * *
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
* * * * * * *
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
* * * * * * *
29 30 31
* * *
Selectable

Calendar Confirmation
Confirm Selection *
Cancel Selection *
Operable

Print / Delete
Print NA
Delete History P

Revision: 1 Page 56 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Alarm History Screen

Displayed Columns
Alarm History Viewer
Activation Time P
Deactivation Time P
Ack Time P
User P
Message P

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 57 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Screen

Sechedule Exceptions Entries 1 2 3 4 5 6


Enable * * * * * *
Repeat Interval * * * * * *
Date * * * * * *
Start Time * * * * * *
Duration * * * * * *

Operable
Scheduler Exception
Navigation
"Next" Pushbutton *
"Previous" Pushbutton *
Operable

Scheduler Exception Entry


Pop Up
Enable *

September

November

December
February

October
January

August
March

April

June
May

July
Scheduler Exception Entry

Month Selectable (exclusive) * * * * * * * * * * * *

Scheduler Exception Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


* * * * * * *
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
* * * * * * *
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
* * * * * * *
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
* * * * * * *
29 30 31
* * *
Selectable

Scheduler Exception Repeat


Once *
Yearly *

Revision: 1 Page 58 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Screen

Bounds check
Scheduler Exception Time

Max
Min
Entries
Start Time Hour 0 23 *
Start Time Min 0 59 *
Duration Day 0 31 *
Duration Hour 0 23 *
Duration Minute 0 59 *
Operable

System Schedule Pop Up


Enable *

Last Week of Month


2nd Week of Month

3rd Week of Month

4th Week of Month


1st Week of Month
Every 4 Weeks
Every 2 weeks
Every Week
Once

System Schedule Pop Up


Repeat Interval * * * * * * * * *
Wednesday

Thursday

Saturday
Monday

Tuesday

Sunday
Friday

System Schedule Pop Up


Day * * * * * * *
Bounds check

System Schedule Pop Up


Max
Min

Time entries
Start Time Hour 0 23 *
Start Time Min 0 59 *
Duration Day 0 31 *
Duration Hour 0 23 *
Duration Minute 0 59 *

Revision: 1 Page 59 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Screen

Selectable
System Schedule Pop Up
Mode Selection
Test Without Load *
Test With Load *

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 60 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Generator Report Screen

Selectable
Generator Report Settings
Enable *

Bounds Check
Units
Max
Min
Generator Report Settings
Sample Rate 1 60 Min *
Minimum Load 0 100 % *
USB Not Available

Generator Report
Management (Insert usb and
Pass Msg

confirm ability to export, as


well as fail when not
connected)
Export to USB * *
Eject USB * *
Procedure

Generator Report
Management - Delete
Create 2 gen reports *
Press Delete Button *
Confirm Message Appears *
No reports appear under
search *
Verify Highlight

View Report
Report Note
Select
Name

Report Menu
Gen 1 * * * * *
Gen 2 * * * * *
Gen 3 * * * * *
Gen 4 * * * * *
Gen 5 * * * * *
Gen 6 * * * * *
Gen 7 * * * * *
Gen 8 * * * * *
TG * * * * *

Revision: 1 Page 61 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Generator Report Screen

Load Demand Stop


Genset Name

Shutdown

Runtime
Warning
Running
Manual
Auto

Load
Report Status Table
Gen 1 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 2 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 3 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 4 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 5 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 6 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 7 * * * * * * * * *
Gen 8 * * * * * * * * *
TG * * * * * * * * *

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 62 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Current Alarm Screen P1

Functional
Alarm Control - Flyout
Acknowledge All. Alarm Silence P
Alarm Reset P
Print *

Alarm and
Horn
Current alarm system alarm checks
Remote Genset E-Stop Active P
System in Manual P
Low Fuel Main Tank P
MCM 1 Hardware Failure P
MCM 2 Hardware Failure P
Station Power UPS Alarm P
Station Power From Batteries (1 minute before appearing) P
PLC Communication Failure P
Utility 1 Failure P
Utility 2 Failure P

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 63 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Current Alarm Screen P2

Unexpected CB Rack In or Rack


Protective Relay Failure
Overcurrent Trip

CB in Manual
Ground Fault

Lockout Trip
Fail to Open

Fail to Close
Current
CB Name

Alarms for
Genset

Out
Breakers
Gen 1A P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 2A P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 3A P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 4A P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 1B P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 2B P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 3B P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Gen 4B P P P NA P NA NA P NA
Shutdown with Breaker Fail to Open

Communication Failure

PreHigh Engine Temp


High Battery Voltage

Low Battery Voltage

PreLow Oil Pressure


Fail to Come Online

Low Coolant Temp


Charger AC Failure

High Engine Temp

Low Oil Pressure


Common Alarm
Genset Name

Current
Not in Auto

Fail to Start

Overspeed
Alarms for
Genset
Controllers
Gen 1A P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 2A P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 3A P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 4A P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 1B P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 2B P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 3B P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P
Gen 4B P P P P P P * * * P P P P P P P

Revision: 1 Page 64 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Current Alarm Screen P2

Low Coolant Level

Under Frequency

NEC Fail to Open

NEC Fail to Close


Emergency Stop
High AC Voltage

Low AC Voltage
Low Fuel Level

Reverse KVAR
Ground Fault

Short Circuit
Overcurrent

Reverse KW
Current

Fail to Sync
Overload
Alarms for
Genset
Controllers
Gen 1A * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 2A * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 3A * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 4A * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 1B * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 2B * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 3B * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Gen 4B * * NA P P NA P P * * * P P NA NA
Active level Displays

Loadbus
Current Alarm
Shed Level 1
Active P
Shed Level 2
Active P
Shed Level 3
Active P
Shed Level 4
Active P
Shed Level 5
Active P
Shed Level 6
Active P
Shed Level 7
Active P

Revision: 1 Page 65 of 159


TG
UTB
UTA
GMB
GMA
Main
52-F4B
52-F3B
52-F2B
52-F1B
52-F4A
52-F3A
52-F2A
52-F1A

Genset
Current
Current
Current

Revision: 1
Breakers

Alarms for
Alarms for
Alarms for

Controllers
Load Breakers
ORDER NO: 7384760

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Genset Name CB Name Load Name

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Shutdown with Breaker Fail to Open Fail to Open Fail To Open

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

Fail to Come Online Fail to Close Fail To Close

P
Communication Failure Fail to Sync Ground Fault

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P

Common Alarm Aux Failure Lockout Trip

P
Ground Fault Overcurrent Trip

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

Not in Auto
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

P
P
P
P
High Battery Voltage Protective Relay Fail

NA
Lockout Trip

NA
NA
NA
NA
Low Battery Voltage Protective Relay Failure

NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA

In Manual
Equinix - SE-4-2

P
P
P
P
Charger AC Failure Unexpected CB Open

NA
P
P
P
P
P
Fail to Start Unexpected CB Close
TEST FORMS: Current Alarm Screen P2

P
NA
NA
NA
NA
Low Coolant Temp Unexpected Change to Manual

P
P
P
P
P
Pre-High Engine Temperature Unexpected CB Rack In or Rack Out

P
P
P
P
P
High Engine Temperature In Manual

P
Pre-Low Oil Pressure

P
Low Oil Pressure

P
Overspeed

Page 66 of 159
ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Current Alarm Screen P2

Low Coolant Level

Under Frequency

NEC Fail to Open

NEC Fail to Close


Emergency Stop
High AC Voltage

Low AC Voltage
Low Fuel Level

Reverse KVAR
Ground Fault

Short Circuit
Overcurrent

Reverse KW
Current

Fail to Sync
Overload
Alarms for
Genset
Controllers
TG P P NA P P NA P P NA NA NA P P NA NA

Protective Relay Failure


Ground Fault
Fail To Open

Fail To Close

Lockout Trip
Load Name

In Manual
Current
Alarms for
Load Breakers
52-TG/LB P P P NA P NA P P

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 67 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Security Pop Up Screen

Disable Indication
Enable Indication
Bounds Check
Security popup - Auto

Units
Max
Min
Logout
Automatic Logout Delay 0 60 Min P P P

Operable
Security popup - Create new
Operator User
User Name Operator1 P

New Password (Ops12345) P


Confirm Password
(Ops12345) P
User Group Operator P
Add User (Created
Successfully) P
Login as Operator 1 P
Login Passed P
Logout P
Login as Tech P
Delete User Operator1 P
Operator1 Cannot login
(deleted) P
Event log shows Operator1
deleted P

Revision: 1 Page 68 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Security Pop Up Screen

Operable
Security popup - Create new
Manager User
User Name Manager1 P

New Password (Man12345) P


Confirm Password
(Man12345) P
User Group Manager P
Add User (Created
Successfully) P
Login as Manager1 P
Login Passed P
Logout P
Login as Tech P
Delete User Manager1 P
Manager1 Cannot login
(deleted) P
Event log shows Manager1
deleted P
Operable

Security popup - Create new


Technician User
User Name Technic1 P
New Password (Tec12345) P
Confirm Password
(Tec12345) P
User Group Technician P
Add User (Created
Successfully) P
Login as Technic1 P
Login Passed P
Logout P
Login as Tech P
Delete User Technic1 P
Technic1 Cannot login
(deleted) P
Event log shows Technic1
deleted P

Revision: 1 Page 69 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Setup Popup Email-SMTP Screen

Operable
Email Address(es) Setup
Enter valid email address into "To" *
Enter valid email address into "CC" *
Enter valid email address into "BCC" *

Operable
SMTP Ping and Test
Save SMTP shows fail message (no network cable) *
Save SMTP shows success message (network cable attached to HMI) *
Ping Test shows fail message (no network cable) *
Ping Test shows success message (network cable attached to HMI) *

Email Received
Email Alarm Test
Generate an alarm to appear on the HMI *
Email received for alarm activation *
Remove email addresses from To, CC, and To *

Items marked with a "*" are excluded from static test since the
testing was performed as part of the HMI image

Revision: 1 Page 70 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Hardware Switches and Lights

Switch turned to close closes breaker

Switch turned to open opens breaker


Open indicator operable (green LED)

Closed indicator operable (Red LED)

Lockout trip indicator on (Red LED)


Lockout Trip Opens Breaker
Main CB position, control, and lockout
relay (verify auto manual switches are in
manual to control the breaker)
52-TA P P P P P P
52-TB P P P P P P
52-TG/LB P P P P P P

Manual Indicator (Amber)


Auto Indicator (Green)

Auto / Manual Switches


52-TA P P
52-TB P P
52-TG/LB P P

Revision: 1 Page 71 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Island Link Failure Tests
IO Link Test Configuration
System Start is not active P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Manual is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Island Link Failure Test Static


Start With IO Link Test Configuration P
Ensure the system mode is in manual P
Go to the alarm screen on the HMI P
Remove link 1 from IO 2 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 2 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 2 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 2 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 2 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 2 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 2 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 2 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear

Remove link 1 from IO 3 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 3 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 3 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 3 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 3 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 3 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 3 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 3 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 4 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 4 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 4 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 4 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 4 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 4 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 4 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 4 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P

Revision: 1 Page 72 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Island Link Failure Tests
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 5 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 5 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 5 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 5 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 5 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 5 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 5 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 5 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 6 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 6 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 6 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 6 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 6 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 6 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 6 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 6 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 7 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 7 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 7 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 7 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 7 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 7 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 7 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 7 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 8 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 8 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 8 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 8 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 8 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 8 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 8 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 8 P

Revision: 1 Page 73 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Island Link Failure Tests
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 9 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 9 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 9 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 9 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 9 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 9 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 9 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 9 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 10 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 10 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 10 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 10 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 10 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 10 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 10 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 10 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Remove link 1 from IO 13 P


Alarm on HMI for Island 13 Link 1 Failure P
Replace link 1 on IO 13 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Remove link 2 from IO 13 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 13 Link 2 Failure P
Remove link 1 from IO 13 P
Alarm on HMI for Island 13 Comm Failure P
Replace both links on IO 13 P
Acknowledge and Reset Alarms P
Alarms Clear P

Revision: 1 Page 74 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trans Type Man Gen Control
Manual Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
Manual Standby Configuration
System Start signal is not active P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Manual Transition Type is Selected on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
All alarms acknowledged P
Only Active alarms are System being in manual, Load Control Off, Generators will not
start P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G1A Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G1A P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G1A P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G2A Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G2A P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P

Revision: 1 Page 75 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trans Type Man Gen Control
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G2A P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G3A Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G3A P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G3A P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G4A Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G4A P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G4A P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P

Revision: 1 Page 76 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trans Type Man Gen Control
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G1B Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G1B P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G1B P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G2B Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G2B P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G2B P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Revision: 1 Page 77 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Trans Type Man Gen Control
Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G3B Static Field
Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G3B P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G3B P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Manual Generator Operation From the Touchscreen - G4B Static Field


Start With Manual Standby Configuration P
From the online, press the genset G4B P
Verify the name in the pulldown matches the genset to test P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Start the genset by pressing the Genset Start Pushbutton P
When the genset is ready to load verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are
available to press P
Close the genset paralleling breaker by pressing the CB Close Button P
Genset Circuit Breaker closes P
Go to the oneline and verify desired genset to test is the one connected and running
on the oneline P
Return to the gen summary screen for genset G4B P
Open the Fly out window to access the genset control buttons P
Verify that the Genset CB Open pushbutton is available to press P
Open the genset Circuit breaker by pressing the CB Open Pushbutton P
Genset ciruit breaker opens P
Verify the genset stop and CB close buttons are available to press P
Stop the genset by pressing the Generator Stop Pushbutton P
Genset Stops P

Revision: 1 Page 78 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Manual EODO-EOFM Test
Load Manual Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different
Load Manual Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
All EODO or EOFM load breakers are open P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Load Manual Test EODO or EOFM type test Static Field


Go to the oneline screen P
Touch the load named 52-F1A P
Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F1A is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F1A to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F1A is open P
Touch the load named 52-F1A to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F2A P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F2A is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F2A to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F2A is open P

Revision: 1 Page 79 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Manual EODO-EOFM Test
Touch the load named 52-F2A to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F3A P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F3A is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F3A to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F3A is open P
Touch the load named 52-F3A to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F4A P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F4A is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F4A to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F4A is open P
Touch the load named 52-F4A to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F1B P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P

Revision: 1 Page 80 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Manual EODO-EOFM Test
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F1B is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F1B to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F1B is open P
Touch the load named 52-F1B to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F2B P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F2B is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F2B to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F2B is open P
Touch the load named 52-F2B to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Touch the load named 52-F3B P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F3B is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F3B to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F3B is open P
Touch the load named 52-F3B to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Revision: 1 Page 81 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Manual EODO-EOFM Test

Touch the load named 52-F4B P


Manual screen pops up P
Check the Manual Enable Box and confirm P
Manual indicator for load appears in graphic P
CB Close button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Close Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F4B is closed P
Touch the load named 52-F4B to bring the manual screen back P
CB Open button is enabled to press P
Press the CB Open Button and confirm P
Close the manual pop up P
Confirm 52-F4B is open P
Touch the load named 52-F4B to bring the manual screen back P
Uncheck the Manual Enable box and confirm P
Manual indicator graphic goes away P
Close the Manual screen P

Revision: 1 Page 82 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Sequence Test Setup
Static Test Sequence Setup Static
Under Generator Report, Enable genset reports under Report Settings P
Under Run Report, Enable Run reports under Report Settings P

Revision: 1 Page 83 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different.
This sequence is set for the UM to open on Utility Failure
OT Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB and 52-TG/LB are closed P
All load controlled breakers are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P
TG/LB switch is in Load Bank mode P

Test Without Load Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Test Without Load P
Gensets signaled to start on both the buses P
Gensets close to gen bus P

Return From Test Without Load Static Field


Test Switched Off P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P

Utility Failure Sequence Utility Fail Does not Expire Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Set the utility 1 fail Time Delay to 5 seconds in the DMC (Setup page 3) P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts P
Return Utility 1 in Less than the Utility 1 Time Delay P
No Change to the system P
System is still fed by the Utility source 1 P
Restore the utility 1 fail time delay back to orignal value P

Start with OT Standby Configuration P


Set the utility 2 fail Time Delay to 5 seconds in the DMC (Setup page 3) P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts P
Return Utility 2 in Less than the Utility 2 Time Delay P
No Change to the system P
System is still fed by the Utility source 2 P
Restore the utility 2 fail time delay back to orignal value P

Revision: 1 Page 84 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail

Utility 1 Failure Sequence, Commit to transfer check, Utility open on fail Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Prepare to Fail then return the utility while both GMA and UTA are open, transferring
to gens P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Return Utility 1 P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
GMA Closes. Demonstrates commit to transfer P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts P

Return From Utility 1Failure Sequence Open Transition, no bypass Static Field
Continuing from last test P
Allow Retransfer time for loadbus 1 to complete P
GMA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Utility 2 Failure Sequence, Commit to transfer check, Utility open on fail Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Prepare to Fail then return the utility while both GMB and UTB are open, transferring
to gens P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 2 starts P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Return Utility 2 P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
GMB Closes. Demonstrates commit to transfer P

Revision: 1 Page 85 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts P

Return From Utility 2 Failure Sequence Open Transition, no bypass Static Field
Continuing from last test P
Allow Retransfer time for loadbus 1 to complete P
GMB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Utility 1 Failure Sequence, Utility opens on Fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Utility 1 Failure Sequence Open Transition, bypass Static Field
Continuing from last test P
Return Utility 1 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads open on Loadbus 1 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Utility 2 Failure Sequence, Utility opens on Fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Revision: 1 Page 86 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 2 starts P
Loads open on Loadbus 2 per the load add/shed sequence P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Utility 2 Failure Sequence Open Transition, bypass Static Field
Continuing from last test P
Return Utility 2 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads open on Loadbus 2 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Return From Utility 1 Failure Sequence Open Transition, Authorized Return Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Check the Authorized return enable checkbox, setup page 3 P
Perform Utility 1 Failure sequence to power loadbus 1 P
Return Utility 1 P
Initiate graphic for TP1 appears P
Open the dialog and press the start button for TP1 P
Retransfer timer for TP1 starts P
Press the Return Stop button P
Retransfer timer for TP1 stops P
Press the start button for TP1 P
Retransfer timer for TP1 Restarts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Revision: 1 Page 87 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
Uncheck the Authorized return enable checkbox P

Return From Utility 2 Failure Sequence Open Transition, Authorized Return Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Check the Authorized return enable checkbox, setup page 3 P
Perform Utility 2 Failure sequence to power loadbus 2 P
Return Utility 2 P
Initiate graphic for TP2 appears P
Open the dialog and press the start button for TP2 P
Retransfer timer for TP2 starts P
Press the Return Stop button P
Retransfer timer for TP2 stops P
Press the start button for TP2 P
Retransfer timer for TP2 Restarts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P
Uncheck the Authorized return enable checkbox P

Loss of Normal Source: Utility U1 & Utility U2 Failure (Auto - Open Transition) Static Field
Start with Normal Standby Conditions configuration P
Simulate Utility U1 and Utility U2 Failure P

Failure of Utility U1 and Utility U2 is detected in switchgear and signalled to DMC P


Utility Fail Delays for U1 and U2 within the DMC time and expire P
The DMC annunciates a utility source U1 and utility source U2 failure alarm on the
HMI P
UMA, UMB opens P

All feeder breakers on both the buses not assigned to shed level 0 immediately open P
The DMC issues a start signal to Gensets P
Generator Sets start automatically and independently accelerate to rated voltage and
frequency P
The first Generator Set closes to the bus as dictated by the First Start System P
The remaining Generator Sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their Generator
Set breakers when synchronization conditions are met within PCC P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and expires for Loadbus 1 and Loadbus 2 P
A program transition time delay starts and expires P
verify that Min capacity exists for Loadbus 1 P

Revision: 1 Page 88 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
GMA breaker closes P
All feeder breakers on Loadbus 1 assigned to add level 1 close P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
verify that Min capacity exists for Loadbus 2 P
GMB breaker closes P
Load Add sequence starts per normal load control sequence P
Load Demand operates if enabled as described in Load Demand P

Return of Normal Source: Utility U1 after Utility U1 and Utility U2 Failure Static Field
Continuing from last test P
Return Utility 1 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads open on Loadbus 1 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets continue to power Loadbus2, 52-TG/LB Remains open P

Return of Utility Source U2 Static Field


Continuing from last test P
Return Utility 2 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads open on Loadbus 2 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Return of Normal Source Utility U1 and U2 after Utility U1 and Utility U2 Failure Static Field
The DMC detects the removal of the loss of Utility1 (Utility U1 Fail) and Utility U2
(Utility U2 Fail) signal P

Configurable Retransfer time delays for both Utility U1 and Utility U2 start timing P
When the retransfer time expires for U1, verify that GMA opens P

All feeder breakers on Loadbus 1 not assigned to shed level 0 immediately open P
When the retransfer time expires for U2, verify that GMB opens P

All feeder breakers on Loadbus 2 not assigned to shed level 0 immediately open P
DMC removes the start signals from gensets P

Revision: 1 Page 89 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
PCC opens genset breakers and enter their cooldown mode P
Gensets stop P
The System is now in Normal Standby Conditions P

Test With Load on - Loadbus 1 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Loadbus 1 on System Control screen P
Select Test With Load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Test With Load Sequence Open Transition Static Field
Continuing from last test P
System mode turned to off P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Return From Test With Load Sequence, Authorized Return bypassed Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Check the Authorized return enable checkbox, setup page 3 P
Place system into test following test with load sequence for loadbus 1 only P
System mode turned to off P
Authorized return is ignored (removal from test is the authorize) P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P
Uncheck the Authorized return enable checkbox P

Revision: 1 Page 90 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail

Test With Load on - Loadbus 2 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Loadbus 2 on System Control screen P
Select Test With Load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Test With Load Sequence Open Transition Static Field
Continuing from last test P
System mode turned to off P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Return From Test With Load Sequence, Authorized Return bypassed Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Check the Authorized return enable checkbox, setup page 3 P
Place system into test following test with load sequence for loadbus 2 only P
System mode turned to off P
Authorized return is ignored (removal from test is the authorize) P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P
Uncheck the Authorized return enable checkbox P

Hardwired Test With Load - Loadbus1 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Revision: 1 Page 91 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
Select Loadbus 1 on System Control screen P

Select Hardwired Inputs under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System Mode radio buttons are disabled at the local control screen P
Send hardwired Test with Load signal by jumpering TB9-C1 : 5,6 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Hardwired Test With Load Static Field


Continuing from last test P
Remove hardwired Test with Load signal P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Hardwired Test With Load, Disable Hardwired control ( Loadbus1) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Select Hardwired Inputs under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System Mode radio buttons are disabled at the local control screen P
Send hardwired Test with Load signal P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts and expires P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Select Local under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
Mode Control is restored at the local control screen P
Remove hardwired Test with Load signal P

Revision: 1 Page 92 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail
Loadbus 1 remains in the Test with Load mode, confirming local screen now has
control of removal of test. P
Turn System Mode to off P
Retransfer sequence is initiated P

Hardwired System Test Input with Control Selection on Operator (Loadbus1) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure Control selection on system control screen page 1 is set to Operator P

Assert the Hardwired System Test input (default is Customer Input 2) TB9-C1, 5 &6 P
Gensets do not start, system does not enter test showing control is given to operator
and not hardwired inputs P
Remove the Hardwired System Test Input (default is Customer Input 2) P

Hardwired Test With Load - Loadbus2 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Loadbus 2 on System Control screen P

Select Hardwired Inputs under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System Mode radio buttons are disabled at the local control screen P
Send hardwired Test with Load signal by jumpering TB9-C1 : 5,6 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Return From Hardwired Test With Load Static Field


Continuing from last test P
Remove hardwired Test with Load signal P
Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Gensets stop P

Hardwired Test With Load, Disable Hardwired control ( Loadbus2) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Revision: 1 Page 93 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Normal Seq UM open on Fail

Select Hardwired Inputs under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System Mode radio buttons are disabled at the local control screen P
Send hardwired Test with Load signal P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts and expires P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Select Local under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
Mode Control is restored at the local control screen P
Remove hardwired Test with Load signal P
Loadbus 2 remains in the Test with Load mode, confirming local screen now has
control of removal of test. P
Turn System Mode to off P
Retransfer sequence is initiated P

Hardwired System Test Input with Control Selection on Operator (Loadbus2) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure Control selection on system control screen page 1 is set to Operator P

Assert the Hardwired System Test input (default is Customer Input 2) TB9-C1, 5 &6 P
Gensets do not start, system does not enter test showing control is given to operator
and not hardwired inputs P
Remove the Hardwired System Test Input (default is Customer Input 2) P

Revision: 1 Page 94 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different
This sequence is set for the UM to open on Utility Failure
OT Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All load controlled breakers are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P

Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged

Utility Fail Loadbus 1, capacity not met Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place all Gensets except 1 into off P
Fail Utility 1 P
UTA Opens P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Wait for miminum capacity alarm to register P
Minimum capacity to connect alarm is registered P
Gensets remain running P
Return Utility 1 P
Place remaining gens back into auto P
Acknowledge and reset Capacity Alarm P

Utility Fail Loadbus 1, UTA Fail to Open, Utility Return Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail UTA from opening P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTA Fails to Open P
After UTA Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UTA Close signal is sent P
Return Utility 1 P
Acknowledge and reset fail to open alarm P
System in Standby P

Utility Fail Loadbus 1, UTA Fail to Open, Reset Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Revision: 1 Page 95 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Setup system to fail UTA from opening P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTA Fails to Open P
After UTA Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UTA Close signal is sent P
Place System into manual P
Fix UTA to allow opening P
Place System into Auto OT P
Acknowledge fail to open Alarm P
System Follow Utility failure sequence P

UTA Lockout, then utility 1 failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Lockout UTA P
Lockout alarm registered P
No further action taken on system P
Fail Utility1 P
52-TG/LB Opens P
Loads Shed on Loadbus 1 P
Gensets start and close to the genbus P
Return Utility 1 P
Reset Lockout Relay on UTA P
Acknowledge and Reset alarms for Lockout P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for loadbus 1 P
UTA closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 1 P

GMA Lockout on utility failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 1 P
Allow Gensets to connect to loadbus 1 P
Allow Load Add to complete P
Lockout GMA P
Loads Shed on Loadbus 1 P
Gensets remain running P
Return Utility 1 P
UTA Remains open since GMA in lockout P
Reset Lockout relay on GMA P
Acknowledge and reset lockout alarm on GMA P
Program transition timer starts for Loadbus 1 P
Program transition timer expires for Loadbus 1 P
UTA closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 1 P

Revision: 1 Page 96 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
UTA Fail to close, Retransfer Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail UTA closure P
Fail Utility 1 P
Allow Gensets to connect to loadbus 1 P
Return Utility 1 P
Retransfer time delay starts for loadbus 1 P
Bypass retransfer Timer P
GMA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
UTA Close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTA Fails to Close P
After UTA Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the UTA Open signal is sent P
GMA Closes P
Gens supply power to loadbus 1 P
Fix UTA Fail to close condition P
Acknowledge and reset fail to close alarm P
Allow system to retransfer P
System in Standby P

GMA Fail to close on Utility Failure, Utility Return Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMA Closure P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail Time delay Starts and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
GMA Fails to Close P
After GMA Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the GMA Open signal is sent P
Gensets remain nunning P
Return Utility 1 P
UTA Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Add P
Fix GMA to allow closure P
Acknowledge and reset GMA fail to close alarm P

GMA Fail to open on Retransfer Static Field

Revision: 1 Page 97 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMA Opening P
Fail Utility 1 and allow the system to power loadbus1 by Gensets P
Return Utility 1 P
Bypass Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 P
GMA Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
GMA Fails to Open P
After GMA Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the GMA Close signal is sent P
Gensets continue to run supplying power to load P
Fix system to allow GMA Opening P
Acknowledge and reset GMA fail to open alarm P
Retransfer timer timing for loadbus 1 P
System retransfers back to utility P
System in Standby P

Gens Fail to open on Retransfer Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail Gen 1A Opening P
Fail Utility 1 and allow the system to power loadbus1 by Gensets P
Return Utility 1 P
Bypass Retransfer time delay for loadbus 1 P
GMA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
UTA Closes P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P

Genset with its breaker failed to open remains running, powering the genbus P
Remaining Gensets stop P

Utility 1 Failure, Genset Fail to Open Static Field


Continue from last test P
Genset Running with its breaker failed to open P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
All Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets parallel to the already running genset and close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Add P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Revision: 1 Page 98 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Utility Failure, Genset Fail to Open then Shutdown Static Field
Continue from previous test P
Genset Running with its breaker failed to open shuts down P
All other Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
GMA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Loads on Loadbus 1 are not powered P
Return Utility 1 P
UTA Closes immediately P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Add P

Genset Fail to Open and Shutdown then Utility Failure Static Field
Continue from previous test P
A Genset is shutdown with it breaker failed to open P
Fail Utility 1 P
Utility Fail Delay Starts and Expires P
No Additional action P
Return Utility 1 P
Fix Genset 1A, acknowledge and reset the alarms P

UTA Open and Racked out, OT Standby Configuration Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Open and Rack out UTA P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTA P
System places loadbus 1 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 1 remains unpowered P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 1 manual condition P
Program transition time delay starts on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 1 (may have already happened before
transfer time delay expires) P
GMA closes P
Gensets supply power to load P
Rack UTA back in and return to OT Standby Configuration P

Simulate UTA Racked out while closed, OT Standby Configuration, then utility fail Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Simulate Rack out UTA P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTA P
System places loadbus 1 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed P
Fail Utility 1 P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 1 remains unpowered P

Revision: 1 Page 99 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 1 manual condition P
Program transition time delay starts on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 1 (may have already happened before
transfer time delay expires) P
GMA closes P
Gensets supply power to load P
Rack UTA back in, return utility, and return to OT Standby Configuration P

Simulate UTA Racked out while GMA closed supplying load from Gens Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail utility 1 to place gensets on loadbus 1, allow GMA to close P
Simulate Rack out UTA P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTA P
System places loadbus 1 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 1 remains powered by gens P
Rack in UTA. State should be open P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 1 manual condition P
Utility 1 source returns P
Retransfer time delay starts for loadbus 1 P
Bypass retransfer time delay P
System retransfers loadbus 1 back to utility P

GMA Racked Out While UTA was closed Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Rack Out GMA P
Unexpected event alarm registered for GMA P
System switches loadbus 1 to zone manual P
No additional action happens on loadbus 1, Load remains powered by Utility 1 P
Fail Utility 1 P
No additional action happens on loadbus 1, Load remains unpowered P
Rack GMA back in. State should be open P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 1 manual condition P
System responds to utility failure on loadbus 1 P
UTA Opens P
Loads Shed on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 1 P
GMA closes P
Loads add on loadbus 1 P
Gensets supply power to load P

Revision: 1 Page 100 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Simulate GMA Racked Out While UTA is open, Utility 1 failure Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 1 P
Allow system to connect to Genbus through normal utility fail sequence P
Simulate Rack Out GMA before GMA closes P
Unexpected event alarm registered for GMA P
System switches loadbus 1 to zone manual P
No additional action happens on loadbus 1 P
No loadbus requires service or is available P
Gens remain running P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 1 manual condition P
Return Utility 1 P

Utility 1 failure, gens on load, complete genbus failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Disable Quick Shed, Setup Page 4 P
Fail Utility 1 P
Allow gens to connect to loadbus 1 P
Place all available Gensets into shutdown P
GMA opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program transition time delay starts for loadbus 1 P
Program transition time delay expires for loadbus 1 P
Loads are not powered P
Return utility 1 P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P

Utility 1 failure, gens on load, complete genbus failure with gens available Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure load demand is enabled with user defined, gen 1 is the lead unit P

Set the minimum capacity to connect to loadbus to two gen size, Setup page 5 P
Quick Shed is disabled, setup Page 4 P
Fail Utility 1 P
Allow gens to connect to loadbus 1 P
Allow all Gens to shutdown in LD except Gen 1 P
Place Gen 1A into shutdown P
GMA opens P
Loads are not powered P
Program transition time delay starts for loadbus 1 P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
LD stop removed from all available GenSets P
Gensets start and close to gen bus P
Program transition time delay expires for loadbus 1 P
Once Min Capacity online is met GMA closes P

Revision: 1 Page 101 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Load Add stops at appropriate place for number of Gens on line NA
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P
Gen 1A starts and closes to gen bus P
Load Add Completes NA
Return utility 1 P
Allow Retransfer to Utility P

Utility 1 failure gen fails to start, capacity met for GMA closure Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure required online capacity is set to the total number of gensets in the system,
Setup page 5 P
Setup Genset 1A to have a fail to start P
Fail Utility 1 P
UTA Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program Transition Time delay starts after UTA opens and expires P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 1 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 1 Expires P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Loads Add up to # of gens in the system - 1 P
Gen 1A fail to start alarm registered P
Remove Genset 1A fail to start P
Acknowledge alarm and reset P

Unexpected UTA open loadbus 1 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Open UTA unexpectedly (using trip switch or button) P
Unexpected event registered for loadbus 1 P
Loadbus 1 placed into zone manual P
Fail Utility 1 P
System takes no action to service Utility 1 failure while zone is in manual P
Acknowledge and reset Zone 1 manual alarm P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 (Note it may have
already expired after the alarm was reset while bus was dead) P
GMA Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Add P
Gensets supply power to Loadbus 1 P

Revision: 1 Page 102 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
This sequence is set for the UM to open on Utility Failure P
OT Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All load controlled breakers are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P

Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Utility Fail Loadbus 2, capacity not met Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place all Gensets except 1 into off P
Fail Utility 2 P
UTA Opens P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Wait for miminum capacity alarm to register P
Minimum capacity to connect alarm is registered P
Gensets remain running P
Return Utility 2 P
Place remaining gens back into auto P
Acknowledge and reset Capacity Alarm P

Utility Fail Loadbus 2, UTB Fail to Open, Utility Return Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail UTB from opening P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts and Expires P
UT2 Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UT2 Fails to Open P
After UT2 Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UT2 Close signal is sent P
Return Utility 2 P
Acknowledge and reset fail to open alarm P
System in Standby P

Utility Fail Loadbus 2, UTB Fail to Open, Reset Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P

Revision: 1 Page 103 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Setup system to fail UTB from opening P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTB Fails to Open P
After UTB Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UTB Close signal is sent P
Place System into manual P
Fix UTB to allow opening P
Place System into Auto OT P
Acknowledge fail to open Alarm P
System Follow Utility failure sequence P

UTB Lockout, then utility 2 failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Lockout UTB P
Lockout alarm registered P
No further action taken on system P
Fail Utility2 P
52-TG/LB Opens P
Loads Shed on Loadbus 2 P
Gensets start and close to Genbus P
Return Utility 2 P
Reset Lockout Relay on UTB P
Acknowledge and Reset alarms for Lockout P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for loadbus 2 P
UTB closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 2 P

GMB Lockout on utility failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 2 P
Allow Gensets to connect to loadbus 2 P
Allow Load Add to complete P
Lockout GMB P
Loads Shed on Loadbus 2 P
Gensets remain running P
Return Utility 2 P
UTB Remains open since GMB in lockout P
Reset Lockout relay on GMB P
Acknowledge and reset lockout alarm on GMB P
Program transition timer starts for Loadbus 2 P
Program transition timer expires for Loadbus 2 P
UTB closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 2 P

Revision: 1 Page 104 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
UTB Fail to close, Retransfer Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail UTB closure P
Fail Utility 2 P
Allow Gensets to connect to loadbus 2 P
Return Utility 2 P
Retransfer time delay starts for loadbus 2 P
Bypass retransfer Timer P
GMB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
UTB Close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTB Fails to Close P
After UTB Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the UTB Open signal is sent P
GMB Closes P
Gens supply power to loadbus 2 P
Fix UTB Fail to close condition P
Acknowledge and reset fail to close alarm P
Allow system to retransfer P
System in Standby P

GMB Fail to close on Utility Failure, Utility Return Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMB Closure P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail Time delay Starts and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
GMB Close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
GMB Fails to Close P
After GMB Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the GMB Open signal is sent P
Gensets remain running P
Return Utility 2 P
UTB Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Add P
Fix GMB to allow closure P
Acknowledge and reset GMB fail to close alarm P

GMB Fail to open on Retransfer Static Field

Revision: 1 Page 105 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMB Opening P
Fail Utility 2 and allow the system to power loadbus2 by Gensets P
Return Utility 2 P
Bypass Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 P
GMB Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
GMB Fails to Open P
After GMB Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the GMB Close signal is sent P
Gensets continue to run supplying power to load P
Fix system to allow GMB Opening P
Acknowledge and reset GMB fail to open alarm P
Retransfer timer timing for loadbus 2 P
System retransfers back to utility P
System in Standby P

Gens Fail to open on Retransfer Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail Gen 1B Opening P
Fail Utility 2 and allow the system to power loadbus2 by Gensets P
Return Utility 2 P
Bypass Retransfer time delay for loadbus 2 P
GMB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
UTB Closes P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset with its breaker failed to open remains running, powering the genbus P
Remaining Gensets stop P

Utility 2 Failure, Genset Fail to Open Static Field


Continue from last test P
Genset Running with its breaker failed to open P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
All Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets parallel to the already running genset and close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
GMB Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Add P
Loads are powered by the genset source P

Utility Failure, Genset Fail to Open then Shutdown Static Field

Revision: 1 Page 106 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Continue from previous test P
Genset Running with its breaker failed to open shuts down P
All other Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
GMB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Loads on Loadbus 2 are not powered P
Return Utility 2 P
UTB Closes immediately P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Add P

Genset Fail to Open and Shutdown then Utility Failure Static Field
Continue from previous test P
A Genset is shutdown with it breaker failed to open P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail Delay Starts and Expires P
No Additional action P
Return Utility 2 P
Fix Genset 2A, acknowledge and reset the alarms P
52-TG/LB Closes P

UTB Open and Rack out, OT Standby Configuration Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Open and Rack out UTB P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTB P
System places loadbus 2 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 2 remains unpowered P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 2 manual condition P
Program transition time delay starts on loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts and expires P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 2 (may have already happened before
transfer time delay expires) P
GMB closes P
Gensets supply power to load P
Rack UTB back in and return to OT Standby Configuration P

Simulate UTB Racked out while closed, OT Standby Configuration, then utility fail Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
SimulateRack out UTB P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTB P
System places loadbus 2 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed P
Fail Utility 2 P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 2 remains unpowered P

Revision: 1 Page 107 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 2 manual condition P
Program transition time delay starts on loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts and expires P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 2 (may have already happened before
transfer time delay expires) P
GMB closes P
Gensets supply power to load P
Rack UTB back in, return utility, and return to OT Standby Configuration P

Simulate UTB Racked out while GMB closed supplying load from Gens Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail utility 2 to place gensets on loadbus 2 P
Simulate Rack out UTB P
Unexpected event alarm registered for UTB P
System places loadbus 2 into zone manual P
No additional action is performed, loadbus 2 remains powered by gens P
Rack in UTB. State should be open P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 2 manual condition P
Utility 2 source returns P
Retransfer time delay starts for loadbus 2 P
Bypass retransfer time delay P
System retransfers loadbus 2 back to utility P

GMB Racked Out While UTB was closed Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Rack Out GMB P
Unexpected event alarm registered for GMB P
System switches loadbus 2 to zone manual P
No additional action happens on loadbus 2, Load remains powered by Utility 2 P
Fail Utility 2 P
No additional action happens on loadbus 2, Load remains unpowered P
Rack GMB back in. State should be open P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 2 manual condition P
System responds to utility failure on loadbus 2 P
UTB Opens P
Loads Shed on loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay expires on loadbus 2 P
GMB closes P
Loads add on loadbus 2 P
Gensets supply power to load P

Revision: 1 Page 108 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Simulate GMB Racked Out While UTB is open, Utility 2 failure Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 2 P
Allow system to connect to Genbus through normal utility fail sequence P
Simulate Rack Out GMB before GMB closes P
Unexpected event alarm registered for GMB P
System switches loadbus 2 to zone manual P
No additional action happens on loadbus 2 P
No loadbus requires service or is available P
Gens Open Breakers and enter their cool down mode. P
Gensets remain running P
Reset Alarms to cause reset of zone 2 manual condition P
Return Utility 2 P

Utility 2 failure, gens on load, complete genbus failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Disable Quick Shed, Setup Page 4 P
Fail Utility 2 P
Allow gens to connect to loadbus 2 P
Place all available Gensets into shutdown P
GMB opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program transition time delay starts for loadbus 2 P
Program transition time delay expires for loadbus 2 P
Loads are not powered P
Return utility 2 P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P

Utility 2 failure, gens on load, complete genbus failure with gens available Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure load demand is enabled with user defined, gen 1 is the lead unit P

Set the minimum capacity to connect to loadbus to two gen size, Setup page 5 P
Quick Shed is disabled, setup Page 4 P
Fail Utility 2 P
Allow gens to connect to loadbus 2 P
Allow all Gens to shutdown in LD except Gen 1 P
Place Gen 1B into shutdown P
GMB opens P
Loads are not powered P
Program transition time delay starts for loadbus 2 P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
LD stop removed from all available GenSets P
Gensets start and close to gen bus P
Program transition time delay expires for loadbus 2 P

Revision: 1 Page 109 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Util Fail Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Once Min Capacity online is met GMB closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Load Add stops at appropriate place for number of Gens on line NA
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P
Gen 1B starts and closes to gen bus P
Load Add Completes NA
Return utility 2 P
Allow Retransfer to Utility P

Utility 2 failure gen fails to start, capacity met for GMB closure Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure required online capacity is set to the total number of gensets in the system,
Setup page 5 P
Setup Genset 1B to have a fail to start P
Fail Utility 2 P
UTB Opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Program Transition Time delay starts after UTB opens and expires P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts for Loadbus 2 and expires P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For Loadbus 2 Expires P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Gen 1B fail to start alarm registered P
Remove Genset 1B fail to start P
Acknowledge alarm and reset P

Unexpected UTB open loadbus 2 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Open UTB unexpectedly (using trip switch or button) P
Unexpected event registered for loadbus 2 P
Loadbus 2 placed into zone manual P
Fail Utility 2 P
System takes no action to service Utility 2 failure while zone is in manual P
Acknowledge and reset Zone 2 manual alarm P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 2 starts and expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 (Note it may have
already expired after the alarm was reset while bus was dead) P
GMB Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Add P
Gensets supply power to Loadbus 2 P

Revision: 1 Page 110 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
This sequence is set for the UM to open on Utility Failure P
OT Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All load controlled breakers are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P

Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Test With Load loadbus 1, Utility fail 1 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place loadbus 1 into test with load from HMI P
Allow gens to connect to loadbus 1 P
Fail utility 1 P
System remains in test P
Return utility 1 P
System remains in test P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer time delay starts for loadbus 1 P

Test With Load loadbus 1 overload (Authorized return On) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure authorized return is checked, Setup page 3 P
Place the system into test with load from the HMI P
Allow gensets to connect and power the loadbus through GMA P

Give the system a overload signal by asserting the load dump from a gen that is online P
System mode remains in test P
Load shed sequence starts P
Remove the load dump signal. P
Acknowledge and reset alarms for overload P
Remove the system from test P
System retransfers P
System back in standby P
Remove the authorized return, Setup page 3 P

Test With Load loadbus 1 overload (Authorized return Off) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure authorized return is not checked, Setup page 3 P

Revision: 1 Page 111 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Place the system into test with load from the HMI P
Allow gensets to connect and power the loadbus through GMA P

Give the system a overload signal by asserting the load dump from a gen that is online P
System mode changed to off automatically P
GMA Opens P
Load breakers open P
Program transition time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
UTA closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 1 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P

Test Without load, Utility 1 fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place the system into test without load P
Fail utility 1 P
System Mode changed to Off automatically P
Transfer time delay for utility 1 starts and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads on loadbus 1 open P
Program transition Delay starts and expires P
GMA Closes P
Loads on loadbus 1 add per LAS sequence P
Return Utility 1 and bypass to allow retransfer P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P
System does not automatically return to test without load P

Test With Load Loadbus 1, quick shed, Authorized return On Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Turn on Authorized return P
Ensure quick shed is enabled P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 1 P
Allow all loads to add P
Give Gen1A a shutdown fault P
loads on loadbus 1 shed P
loads re-add up to the # of gensets online P
System still in Test P
Remove the system from test and allow the retransfer P
Turn off Authorized return P
Reset Gen 1A shutdown fault P
Aknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load Loadbus 1, quick shed, Authorized return Off Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure quick shed is enabled P

Revision: 1 Page 112 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 1 only P
Allow all loads to add P
Give Gen1A a shutdown fault P
loads on loadbus 1 shed P
loads re-add up to the # of gensets online P
System still in Test P
Remove the system from test and allow the retransfer P
Reset Gen 1A shutdown fault P
Aknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load loadbus 1, capacity not met Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Turn off all Gensets except Gen 1A P

Ensure minimum capacity to connect, loadbus 1 is larger than gen 1 (setup page 5) P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Wait P
Minimum capacity to connect alarm is registered P
System mode automatically changed to off P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P
Acknowledge and reset Capacity Alarm P

Place all gensets that were in off back to auto (restoration to normal conditions) P
Ensure minimum capacity to connect is back to original value as specified on the
settings page P

Test With Load loadbus 1, UTA Fail to open Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Set UTA to fail to open P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 1 only P
Gensets start P
Transfer time delay started and expired for loadbus 1 P
UTA Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTA Fails to Open P
After UTA Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UTA Close signal is sent P
System automatically removed from test P
Gensets stop P

Return from Test With Load loadbus 1 UTA fail to close Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup UTA to fail to close P

Revision: 1 Page 113 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Uncheck Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed, Setup Page 4 P
Place the system into test on loadbus 1 and allow it to be powered by gens with load
add complete P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
GMA Opens P
Load Breakers do not open. P
Program Transition Starts and expires P
UTA close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTA Fails to Close P
After UTA Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the UTA Open signal is sent P
UTA fails to close P
UTA fail to close alarm registered P
Load Breakers open (demonstrates LAS transition to gens from utility source) P
GMA closes P
Load Add Starts P
Load is powered by the Genset source P

Return from UTA fail to close Static Field


Continuing from previous test P
Reset UTA fail to close alarm P
Fix the UTA breaker to allow closure P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
GMA Opens P
Load Breakers do not open. P
Program Transition Starts and expires P
UTA closes P
Gens Open Breakers and enter their cool down mode. P
Genset stop P
Re check Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed P

GMA Fail to close on Test with Load Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMA Closure P
Place system into test with load on loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for loadbus 1 starts and expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Close signal sent P
GMA Fails to close P

Revision: 1 Page 114 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
GMA Fails to close alarm registered P
System removed from test with load automatically P
Gens Open Breakers and enter their cool down mode. P
Genset stop P
UTA Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Add P
Setup system to allow GMA Closure / back to normal standby conditions P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load - Genbus Failure (Quick Shed Disable) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Test with Load Loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 1 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Place all available Gensets into shutdown (e-stop) P
System is removed from test automatically P
GMA opens P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Program transition time delay starts for loadbus 1 P
Wait for program transition time delay to expire for loadbus 1 P
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 1 P
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P

UTA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (GMA Open) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Test with Load Loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA signaled to open P
Initiate a UTA Aux Fail P
UTA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Zone Unknown state P
Gensets Continue to run but GMA remains open. P
System Remains in test and is paused P

UTA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (UTA Aux Fail Reset) Static Field
Continuing from previous test P
Correct UTA Aux Fail fault, without alarm acknowledge P

Revision: 1 Page 115 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
No change to system state P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts P
Loads are powered by the genset source in Test mode P

UTA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (GMA Closed) Static Field
Continuing from previous test P
Loads are powered by the genset source in Test mode P
Initiate a UTA Aux Fail P
UTA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Breaker Unknown state P
System Remains in test, Loads powered by the genset source P
Correct UTA Aux Fail fault and reset alarm P
System Remains in test, Loads powered by the genset source P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
Allow system to retransfer to Utility Source P
System in standby P

GMA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (GMA Open) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Test with Load Loadbus 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Initiate a GMA Aux Fail P
GMA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Zone Unknown state P
Gensets Continue to run but GMA remains open. P
System Remains in test and paused P

GMA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (GMA Aux Fail Reset) Static Field
Continuing from previous test P
Fix GMA Aux Fail fault P
No change to system state P
Reset Alarm P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 1 P
GMA Closes P
Load Add Starts P
Loads are powered by the genset source in Test mode P

GMA Aux Fail, Loadbus 1 Test With Load (GMA Closed) Static Field

Revision: 1 Page 116 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-A
Continuing from previous test P
Loads are powered by the genset source in Test mode P
Initiate a GMA Aux Fail P
GMA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Zone Unknown state P
System Remains in test, Loads powered by the genset source P
Correct GMA Aux Fail fault and reset alarm P
System Remains in test, Loads powered by the genset source P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
Allow system to retransfer to Utility Source P

Test Without load, UTA Aux fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place the system into test without load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Initiate a UTA Aux Fail P
UTA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Zone Unknown state P
System Remains in test without load with Gens running and connected P
Take the system out of test without load by putting the mode to Off P
Genset stop P
Correct UTA Aux Fail fault and reset alarm P
System in standby P

Test Without load, GMA Aux fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place the system into test without load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Initiate a GMA Aux Fail P
GMA Aux Fail Alarm becomes active P
Transfer Pair 1 is paused and put into the Breaker Unknown state P
System Remains in test without load with Gens running and connected P
Correct GMA Aux Fail fault and reset alarm P
Take the system out of test without load by putting the mode to off P
Genset stop P

Revision: 1 Page 117 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
This sequence is set for the UM to open on Utility Failure P
OT Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All load controlled breakers are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P

Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Test With Load Loadbus 2, Utility fail 2 Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place Loadbus 2 into test with load from HMI P
Allow gens to connect to Loadbus 2 P
Fail Utility 2 P
System remains in test P
Return Utility 2 P
System remains in test P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer time delay starts for Loadbus 2 P

Test With Load Loadbus 2 overload (Authorized return On) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure authorized return is checked, Setup page 3 P
Place the system into test with load from the HMI P
Allow gensets to connect and power the loadbus through GMB P

Give the system a overload signal by asserting the load dump from a gen that is online P
System mode remains in test P
Load shed sequence starts P
Remove the load dump signal. P
Acknowledge and reset alarms for overload P
Remove the system from test P
System retransfers P
System back in standby P
Remove the authorized return, Setup page 3 P

Test With Load Loadbus 2 overload (Authorized return Off) Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure authorized return is not checked, Setup page 3 P

Revision: 1 Page 118 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Place the system into test with load from the HMI P
Allow gensets to connect and power the loadbus through GMB P

Give the system a overload signal by asserting the load dump from a gen that is online P
System mode changed to off automatically P
GMB Opens P
Load breakers open P
Program transition time delay for Loadbus 2 starts and expires P
UTB closes P
Loads add on Loadbus 2 P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P

Test Without load, Utility 2 fail Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Place the system into test without load P
Fail Utility 2 P
System Mode changed to Off automatically P
Transfer time delay for Utility 2 starts and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 open P
Program transition Delay starts and expires P
GMB Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 2 add per LAS sequence P
Return Utility 2 and bypass to allow retransfer P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P
System does not automatically return to test without load P

Test With Load Loadbus 2, quick shed, Authorized return On Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Turn on Authorized return P
Ensure quick shed is enabled P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 2 P
Allow all loads to add P
Give Gen1B a shutdown fault P
loads on Loadbus 2 shed P
loads re-add up to the # of gensets online P
System still in Test P
Remove the system from test and allow the retransfer P
Turn off Authorized return P
Reset Gen 1B shutdown fault P
Aknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load Loadbus 2, quick shed, Authorized return Off Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Ensure quick shed is enabled P

Revision: 1 Page 119 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 2 only P
Allow all loads to add P
Give Gen1B a shutdown fault P
loads on Loadbus 2 shed P
loads re-add up to the # of gensets online P
System still in Test P
Remove the system from test and allow the retransfer P
Reset Gen 1B shutdown fault P
Aknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load Loadbus 2, capacity not met Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Turn off all Gensets except Gen 1B P

Ensure minimum capacity to connect, Loadbus 2 is larger than gen 1 (setup page 5) P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Wait P
Minimum capacity to connect alarm is registered P
System mode automatically changed to off P
Gensets Open Breakers and enter their cooldown mode. P
Genset stop P
Acknowledge and reset Capacity Alarm P

Place all gensets that were in off back to auto (restoration to normal conditions) P
Ensure minimum capacity to connect is back to original value as specified on the
settings page P

Test With Load Loadbus 2, UTB Fail to open Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Set UTB to fail to open P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 2 only P
Gensets start P
Transfer time delay started and expired for Loadbus 2 P
UTB Open Signal sent to CB P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Open Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTB Fails to Open P
After UTB Fail to Open alarm annunciates, the UTB Close signal is sent P
System automatically removed from test P
Gensets stop P

Return from Test With Load Loadbus 2 UTB fail to close Static Field
Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup UTB to fail to close P

Revision: 1 Page 120 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
Uncheck Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed, Setup Page 4 P
Place the system into test on Loadbus 2 and allow it to be powered by gens with load
add complete P
Remove system from test P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
GMB Opens P
Load Breakers do not open. P
Program Transition Starts and expires P
UTB close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
UTB Fails to Close P
After UTB Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the UTB Open signal is sent P
Load Breakers open (demonstrates LAS transition to gens from utility source) P
GMB closes P
Load Add Starts P
Load is powered by the Genset source P

Return from UTB fail to close Static Field


Continuing from previous test P
Reset UTB fail to close alarm P
Fix the UTB breaker to allow closure P
Retransfer Time Delay Starts P
Bypass Retransfer Time Delay P
GMB Opens P
Load Breakers do not open. P
Program Transition Starts and expires P
UTB closes P
Gens Open Breakers and enter their cool down mode. P
Genset stop P
Re check Open Transition Utility Transfer Load Shed P

GMB Fail to close on Test with Load Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Setup system to fail GMB Closure P
Place system into test with load on Loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to genbus P
Transfer time delay for Loadbus 2 starts and expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
GMB Close signal sent P
System waits for Fail Delay and pulses Close Signal off then back on. Repeats this 3
times (Retries adjustable via PLC - default = 3) P
GMB Fails to Close P

Revision: 1 Page 121 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: OT Test Seq Abnorm-MSH-B
After GMB Fail to Close alarm annunciates, the GMB Open signal is sent P
System removed from test with load automatically P
Gens Open Breakers and enter their cool down mode. P
Genset stop P
UTB Closes P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Add P
Setup system to allow GMB Closure / back to normal standby conditions P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P

Test With Load - Genbus Failure Static Field


Start with OT Standby Configuration P
Select Test with Load Loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close to gen bus P
Transfer Time Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Opens P
Loads on Loadbus 2 Shed P
Program transition time delay starts and expires for Loadbus 2 P
GMB Closes P
Load Add Starts P
Loads are powered by the genset source P
Place all available Gensets into shutdown (e-stop) P
System is removed from test automatically P
GMB opens P
Loads shed on Loadbus 2 P
Program transition time delay starts for Loadbus 2 P
Wait for program transition time delay to expire for Loadbus 2 P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for Loadbus 2 P
Remove Genset shutdown alarms P

Revision: 1 Page 122 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Load Add Shed Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
Load Add Shed Standby Configuration
Utility is connected to the loadbus P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Load add shed Levels


For the Following tests, use the load add shed levels listed on the HMI Setup P

Load add Dual Utility Failure, all gens online Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 5 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Fail Utility 1 P
Fail Utility 2 P
Utility Fail 1 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads shed on loadbus 1 P
Utility Fail 2 Delay Starts and Expires P
UTB Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 2 starts P
Loads shed on loadbus 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets on both the buses connects to the genbus P
Loads add once min. capacity to connect is met and GM breakers are closed P
Return Utility 1 and Utility 2 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 1 initiate the bypass P
GMA Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 1 starts P
Loads open on loadbus 1 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For loadbus 1 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For loadbus 1 Expires P

Revision: 1 Page 123 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
UTA Closes P
Load Add Starts for loadbus 1 P
While retransfer timer is timing on loadbus 2 initiate the bypass P
GMB Opens P
Program Transition Time delay on loadbus 2 starts P
Loads open on loadbus 2 per the load add/shed sequence P
Program Transition Delay For loadbus 2 Starts P
Program Transition Delay For loadbus 2 Expires P
UTB Closes P
Load Add Starts for loadbus 2 P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the system control screen P
Gensets stop P

Load Add System Start, low capacity, Gen Fails to start on loadbus 1 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P

Set the Required online Capacity to the total of all gensets programmed in the system. P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Remove the hardwired start signal from genset 1A to cause a fail to start P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets start and connect to genbus; GMA is closed P
Load add levels turn on up to the number of gens online P
Load add does not continue without reaching the Required online capacity P
Verify '+' is available to add additional loads P
Return Utility 1 P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
Return hardwired start back to genset 1A P

Load Add System Start, low capacity, Manual Add Level on loadbus 1 Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, ensure 1 genset is capable of powering all levels.
Otherwise only perform this as a static test. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. Set the min. capacity to connect to 1 genset P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Place the PCC controller for all gensets to off except for Gen 1A P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus, GMA closes P
Load add Level 1 turns on P

Load add does not continue without any other genset connecting to the genbus P
Go to the Load Control Screen P

Revision: 1 Page 124 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Press the '+' to add level 2 P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
Press the '+' to add level 3 P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P
Press the '+' to add level 4 P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
Press the '+' to add level 5 P
Load add Level 5 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 5 add P
Press the '+' to add level 6 P
Load add Level 6 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 6 add P
Press the '+' to add level 7 P
Load add Level 7 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 7 add P
Press the '+' to add level 8 P
Load add Level 8 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 8 add P
Remove System start from the DMC for loadbus 1 P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the load control screen P
Gensets stop P

System Start, Overload with Restore on loadbus 1 Static Field


Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Give the system a load dump input P
Load assigned to Shed level 1 on genbus sheds instantly when the load dump is
applied P

Load assigned to level 2 on genbus sheds after load shed time delay expires P
Loads continue to shed on genbus with time delay between levels until all loads not
assigned to level 0 are shed P
Loads assigned to level 0 not shed on loadbus 1 P
Alarm Present for Overload and Shed levels 1-7 P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load Restore buttons are not available for loadbus 1 while load dump is active and
overload alarm unacknowledged P
Remove load dump signal P
Go to the Load Control Screen P

Revision: 1 Page 125 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Load Restore buttons are not available for loadbus 1 while overload alarm
unacknowledged P
Silence alarm horn and reset alarms P
Go back to Load control screen P
Load Restore buttons available for selection P
Restore Shed level 7 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 7 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 6 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 6 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 5 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 5 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 4 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 4 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 3 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 3 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 2 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 2 on loadbus 1 are restored P
Restore Shed level 1 on loadbus 1 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 1 on loadbus 1 are restored P

System Start, Manual Shed with manual restore on Loadbus 1 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load control screen for loadbus 1 shows shed buttons are enabled for all shed levels
except 0 P
Press Load Shed for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 1 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 2 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 3 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 4 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 5 P

Revision: 1 Page 126 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 5 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 6 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus 1 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 1 Shed Level 7 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Restore for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus 1 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus 1 restore P
Return Utility 1 P

System Start, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity not reached for Loadbus 1 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the total of all gens in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1A into shutdown (e.g. estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 1 except for shed level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 1, starting at add level 1 P
Load add levels add up to the number of gensets connected to the bus, separated by
add time delay P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Go to load control screen P

Revision: 1 Page 127 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Levels not re-added available for add on the screen P
Add remaining levels P
Added levels connect back to loadbus 1 P
Return Utility 1 P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1A (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1A fault on HMI P

System Start, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity reached for Loadbus1 Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, quick shed may only operate on a real hardwired input
shutdown signal from a genset. Additionally, this test restores all loads
(automatically) without all gens online. This should be considered to not cause a
possible overload on the system. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the smallest genset in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Fail Utility 1 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1A into shutdown (e.g. estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 1 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 1 P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Load add levels add with gen load add delay timer separating each level P
Load add continues until all levels are added P
Return Utility 1 P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1A (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1A fault on HMI P

Load Add System Start, low capacity, Gen Fails to start on loadbus 2 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P

Set the Required online Capacity to the total of all gensets programmed in the system. P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Remove the hardwired start signal from genset 1B to cause a fail to start P
Fail Utility 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P

Revision: 1 Page 128 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Gensets start and connect to genbus, GMB closes P
Load add levels turn on up to the number of gens online P
Load add does not continue without reaching the Required online capacity P
Verify '+' is available to add additional loads P
Return Utility 2 P
Acknowledge and reset alarms; System retransfers to Normal source P
Return hardwired start back to genset 1B P

Load Add System Start, low capacity, Manual Add Level on loadbus 2 Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, ensure 1 genset is capable of powering all levels.
Otherwise only perform this as a static test. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. Set min. capacity to connect to 1 genset P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Place the PCC controller for all gensets to off except for Gen 1B P
Fail Utility 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus, GMB closes P
Load add Level 1 turns on P

Load add does not continue without any other genset connecting to the genbus P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Press the '+' to add level 2 P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
Press the '+' to add level 3 P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P
Press the '+' to add level 4 P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
Press the '+' to add level 5 P
Load add Level 5 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 5 add P
Press the '+' to add level 6 P
Load add Level 6 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 6 add P
Press the '+' to add level 7 P
Load add Level 7 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 7 add P
Press the '+' to add level 8 P
Load add Level 8 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 8 add P
Remove System start from the DMC for loadbus 2 P
Genset circuit breakers open P

Revision: 1 Page 129 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Load Add levels turn off on the load control screen P
Gensets stop P

System Start, Overload with Restore on loadbus 2 Static Field


Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Give the system a load dump input P
Load assigned to Shed level 1 on genbus sheds instantly when the load dump is
applied P

Load assigned to level 2 on genbus sheds after load shed time delay expires P
Loads continue to shed on genbus with time delay between levels until all loads not
assigned to level 0 are shed P
Loads assigned to level 0 not shed on loadbus 2 P
Alarm Present for Overload and Shed levels 1-7 P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load Restore buttons are not available for loadbus 2 while load dump is active and
overload alarm unacknowledged P
Remove load dump signal P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load Restore buttons are not available for loadbus 2 while overload alarm
unacknowledged P
Silence alarm horn and reset alarms P
Go back to Load control screen P
Load Restore buttons available for selection P
Restore Shed level 7 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 7 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 6 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 6 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 5 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 5 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 4 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 4 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 3 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 3 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 2 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 2 on loadbus 2 are restored P
Restore Shed level 1 on loadbus 2 P
Loads assigned to Shed Level 1 on loadbus 2 are restored P

System Start, Manual Shed with manual restore on loadbus 2 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Fail Utility 2 P

Revision: 1 Page 130 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load control screen for loadbus 2 shows shed buttons are enabled for all shed levels
except 0 P
Press Load Shed for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 1 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 2 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 3 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 4 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 5 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 6 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus 2 shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus 2 Shed Level 7 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Restore for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus 2 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus 2 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus 2 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus 2 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus 2 restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus 2 restore P

Revision: 1 Page 131 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Press Load Restore for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus 2 restore P

System Start, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity not reached for loadbus 2 Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the total of all gens in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Fail Utility 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1B into shutdown (e.g. estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 2 except for shed level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 2, starting at add level 1 P
Load add levels add up to the number of gensets connected to the bus, separated by
add time delay P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Go to load control screen P
Levels not re-added available for add on the screen P
Add remaining levels P
Added levels connect back to loadbus 2 P
Return Utility 2 P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1B (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1B fault on HMI P

System Start, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity reached for Loadbus2 Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, quick shed may only operate on a real hardwired input
shutdown signal from a genset. Additionally, this test restores all loads
(automatically) without all gens online. This should be considered to not cause a
possible overload on the system. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the smallest genset in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Fail Utility 2 P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P

Revision: 1 Page 132 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Utility Fail LAS Priority
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1B into shutdown (e.g. estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 2 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 2 P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Load add levels add with gen load add delay timer separating each level P
Load add continues until all levels are added P
Return Utility 2 P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1B (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1B fault on HMI P

Revision: 1 Page 133 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Load Add Shed Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
Load Add Shed Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Load add shed Levels


For the Following tests, use the load add shed levels listed on the HMI Setup P

Load add Test with load, all gens online (Loadbus 1) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load
(Select TP1) P
Go back to the oneline screen P
Gensets signaled to start, GM closes after min. capacity has met P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 1 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 1 add P
2nd Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
3rd Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P
4th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
5th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 5 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 5 add P
6th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 6 turns on P

Revision: 1 Page 134 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Loads assigned to Level 6 add P
7th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 7 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 7 add P
8th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 8 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 8 add P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the load control screen P
Gensets stop P

Load Add Test with load, low capacity, Manual Add Level (Loadbus 1) Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, ensure 1 genset is capable of powering all levels.
Otherwise only perform this as a static test. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. Set min. capacity to connect to 1 genset only P
Place the PCC controller for all gensets to off except for Gen 1A P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP1
Selected) P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Gensets signaled to start P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus, GM closes P
Load add Level 1 turns on P

Load add does not continue without any other genset connecting to the genbus P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Press the '+' to add level 2 P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
Press the '+' to add level 3 P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P
Press the '+' to add level 4 P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
Press the '+' to add level 5 P
Load add Level 5 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 5 add P
Press the '+' to add level 6 P
Load add Level 6 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 6 add P
Press the '+' to add level 7 P
Load add Level 7 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 7 add P

Revision: 1 Page 135 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Press the '+' to add level 8 P
Load add Level 8 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 8 add P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the system control screen P
Gensets stop P

Test with load, Overload with Restore (Loadbus 1) Static Field


Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP1
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Give the system a load dump input by jumpering terminals G:1 K1803, terminals 11
and 14 P
System removed from test with load automatically P
Remove the load dump signal P
Acknowledge the alarm P
System is back in Standby P

Test with load, Manual Shed with manual restore (Loadbus 1) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load( TP1
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load control screen for loadbus shows shed buttons are enabled for all shed levels
except 0 P
Press Load Shed for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 1 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 2 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 3 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 4 P

Revision: 1 Page 136 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 4 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 5 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 6 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 7 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Restore for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus restore P

Test with load, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity not reached (Loadbus 1) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the total of all gens in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load ( TP1
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1A into shutdown (estop) P
All Loads Shed on Loadbus 1 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on Loadbus 1 P

Revision: 1 Page 137 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Load add levels add up to the number of gensets connected to the bus, separated by
add time delay P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Go to load control screen P
Levels not re-added available for add on the screen P
Add remaining levels P
Added levels connect back to loadbus P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1A (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1A fault on HMI P

Test with load, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity reached (Loadbus 1) Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, quick shed may only operate on a real hardwired input
shutdown signal from a genset. Additionally, this test restores all loads
(automatically) without all gens online. This should be considered to not cause a
possible overload on the system. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the smallest genset in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP1
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMA closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1A into shutdown (estop) P
All Loads Shed on Loadbus 1 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on Loadbus 1 P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Load add levels add with gen load add delay timer separating each level P
Load add continues until all levels are added P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1A (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1A fault on HMI P

Load add Test with load, all gens online (loadbus 2) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P

Revision: 1 Page 138 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. Set min. capacity to connect to 1 genset only P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load
(Select TP2) P
Go back to the oneline screen P
Gensets signaled to start P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus, GMB closes P
Load add Level 1 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 1 add P
2nd Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
3rd Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P
4th Genset in the system connects to the genbus P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
Loads assigned to Level 5 thru Level 8 add on a time basis P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the load control screen P
Gensets stop P

Load Add Test with load, low capacity, Manual Add Level (loadbus 2) Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, ensure 1 genset is capable of powering all levels.
Otherwise only perform this as a static test. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the Setup Screen page 4 P
Set the Required online Capacity above the total of all gensets programmed in the
system. Set min. capacity to connect to 1 genset only P
Place the PCC controller for all gensets to off except for Gen 1B P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load( TP2
Selected) P
Return back to the oneline screen P
Gensets signaled to start P
1st Genset in the system connects to the genbus, GMB closes P
Load add Level 1 turns on P

Load add does not continue without any other genset connecting to the genbus P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Press the '+' to add level 2 P
Load add Level 2 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 2 add P
Press the '+' to add level 3 P
Load add Level 3 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 3 add P

Revision: 1 Page 139 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Press the '+' to add level 4 P
Load add Level 4 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 4 add P
Press the '+' to add level 5 P
Load add Level 5 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 5 add P
Press the '+' to add level 6 P
Load add Level 6 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 6 add P
Press the '+' to add level 7 P
Load add Level 7 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 7 add P
Press the '+' to add level 8 P
Load add Level 8 turns on P
Loads assigned to Level 8 add P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the system control screen P
Gensets stop P

Test with load, Overload with Restore (loadbus 2) Static Field


Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP2
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Give the system a load dump input by jumpering terminals G:1 K1803, terminals 11
and 14 P
System removed from test with load automatically P
Remove the load dump signal P
Acknowledge the alarm P
System is back in Standby P

Test with load, Manual Shed with manual restore (loadbus 2) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP2
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Go to the Load Control Screen P
Load control screen for loadbus shows shed buttons are enabled for all shed levels
except 0 P
Press Load Shed for Level 1 P

Revision: 1 Page 140 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 1 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 2 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 3 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 4 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 5 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 6 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Shed for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus shed P
Shed Alarm comes on for loadbus Shed Level 7 P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Press Load Restore for Level 7 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 7 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 6 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 6 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 5 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 5 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 4 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 4 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 3 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 3 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 2 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 2 on loadbus restore P
Press Load Restore for Level 1 P
Loads assigned to Load shed level 1 on loadbus restore P

Test with load, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity not reached (loadbus 2) Static Field
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Revision: 1 Page 141 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority

Set the Required Online Capacity to the total of all gens in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP2
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1B into shutdown (estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 2 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 2 P
Load add levels add up to the number of gensets connected to the bus, separated by
add time delay P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P
Acknowledge Alarm and Reset P
Go to load control screen P
Levels not re-added available for add on the screen P
Add remaining levels P
Added levels connect back to loadbus P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1B (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1B fault on HMI P

Test with load, Quick Shed, Required online Capacity reached (loadbus 2) Static Field
NOTE: if this is a field test, quick shed may only operate on a real hardwired input
shutdown signal from a genset. Additionally, this test restores all loads
(automatically) without all gens online. This should be considered to not cause a
possible overload on the system. P
Start With Load Add Shed Standby Configuration P
Ensure Quick shed is enabled (Setup page 4) P

Set the Required Online Capacity to the smallest genset in the system (Setup page 4) P
Disable Load Demand (Load demand Screen) P
Go to the system control screen and place the System Mode into test with load (TP2
Selected) P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets circuit breakers close to the gen bus, GMB closes P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
Put Gen1B into shutdown (estop) P
All Loads Shed on loadbus 2 except for level 0 P
Load add restarts on loadbus 2 P
Quick shed alarm had become active on alarm screen P

Revision: 1 Page 142 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Test LAS Priority
Load add levels add with gen load add delay timer separating each level P
Load add continues until all levels are added P
Place the system mode to off on the system control screen P
Enable Load Demand (load demand screen) P
Place quick shed back to original value (Setup page 4) P
Set the Required Online Capacity to original value (Setup page 4) P
Fix Gen 1B (remove estop/shutdown condition) P
Reset Gen 1B fault on HMI P

Revision: 1 Page 143 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: LB Test
The system is designed with the assumption that the Load bank breaker is a regular breaker on the paralleling
bus (similar to a normal feeder breaker). This breaker may be a dual-purpose breaker being shared with a
Temporary generator. LB/TG can be configured on the Setup page of the HMI

Load Bank Setup


OT Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB and 52-TG/LB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P

Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Load Bank Test On Static Field


Load Bank operation mode has been enabled on DMCB Door Switch P
On the HMI navigate to the Load Bank Control Screen P
Enable the 'Load Bank Control Mode'. P
Select the Generator Set to be controlled from the dropdown menu P

Open the fly out and Press the 'Generator Start' button to start the selected Generator Set P
When Running and ready to load, press the 'Generator CB Close' button to close the
selected breaker P
Additional Generator Set can be started and brought online by selecting it from the
dropdown menu P
Once at least one Generator Set is online, press the 'Load Bank Control CB Close' button to
close the Load Bank Breaker 52-LB/TG P

Load Bank Test Off Static Field


To end Load bank test, disable the 'Load Bank Control Mode' P
Load Bank Breaker will open P
The Generator Set(s) paralleling breaker(s) will open P
The Generator Set(s) will enter into cool down mode P
The system returns to standby mode of operation. P

Utility fails while in load Bank Test Mode Static Field


On the HMI navigate to the Load Bank Control Screen P
Enable the 'Load Bank Control Mode' P
Select the Generator Set to be controlled from the dropdown menu P

Open the fly out and Press the 'Generator Start' button to start the selected Generator Set P
When Running and ready to load, press the 'Generator CB Close' button to close the
selected breaker P

Revision: 1 Page 144 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: LB Test
Additional Generator Set can be started and brought online by selecting it from the
dropdown menu P
Once at least one Generator Set is online, press the 'Load Bank Control CB Close' button to
close the Load Bank Breaker 52-LB/TG P
Utility Fails P

Generator Set(s) signaled to start (Thus Generator Set(s) not running in Load Bank mode) P
Load Bank Breaker will open P
'Load Bank Control Mode' will be disabled and Load bank test cancelled. P
Generator Set(s) which were running in load bank mode keep running with their paralleling
breakers closed. P

Generator Set(s) which were not running in load bank mode close their paralleling breakers P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P

Return of Normal Source Static Field


Remove System start from the DMC P
The Generator Set(s) paralleling breakers will open P
Load Add levels turn off on the system control screen P
The Generator Sets will enter into cool down mode P
The system returns to standby mode of operation. P

Revision: 1 Page 145 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Paralleling Temp Gen Test
Paralleling Temporary Generator Set Sequence of Operation
OT Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All Generator Set(s) breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P

Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P


System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P
Paralleling Temporary Generator Set operation mode has been enabled on DMCB
Door, and 52-TG/LB breaker has been closed. P

Normal source failure with System Start Static Field


Fail Utility P
Generator Set(s) signaled to start P
Temporary Generator Set is inhibited from closing to the bus until at least one
permanent Generator Set is closed to the bus P
At least one permanent Generator Set(s) circuit breaker closes to the Genbus. Note:
if no permanent Generator Set is available to come online the inhibit on the
Temporary Generator will be removed P
Remaining Generator Sets synchronize to the Genbus and close their respective
Generator Set breakers when synchronization conditions are met
P
Load add sequence starts P
Load add sequence runs to completion P
The Generator Sets proportionally share load P

Load Demand operates if enabled as described in the load demand section P

Return of Normal source Static Field


Remove System start from the DMC P
Generator Set(s) circuit breakers open P
Load Add levels turn off on the system control screen P
Generator Sets stop P

Revision: 1 Page 146 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Demand Test
Load Demand Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
Load Demand Test Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P
For static test, ensure all 3300 simulators are set to a high unloaded level, as outlined
in the Static test hardware setup P

System Start, Load demand stop sequence with low load Static Field
Start with Load Demand Test Configuration P
Ensure load demand is enabled P
Ensure the system load is smaller than the smallest genset P
Fail both Utilities P
Allow gensets on both the buses to start and connect to Loadbus P
Wait for the total time of the initial time delay and shutdown time delay to expire (no
indication, time this from the HMI clock or stopwatch) P
Genset 8 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 7 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 6 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 5 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 4 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 3 enters into load demand stop P
~5 seconds later, Genset 2 enters into load demand stop P
Genset 1 continues to run P
Return both utilities P
Genset circuit breakers open P
Gensets stop P

Test without load, Load Demand Stop, Utility Fail Static Field
Start with Load Demand Test Configuration P
Ensure load demand is enabled P
Place the system load near 0 P
Place the system into test without load P
Allow all gensets except for the lead to enter into load demand stop P
Assert the system start to the DMC by failing both the Utilities P
Generators are removed from load demand stop P
System removed from test without load automatically P
Gensets power the gen bus P

Revision: 1 Page 147 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Load Demand Test
Load add runs to completion P
Place the system mode to off P
Gensets open their breakers P
Gensets Stop P
System in standby P

Test with load, Load Demand Stop, Utility Fail Static Field
Start with Load Demand Test Configuration P
Ensure load demand is enabled P
Place the system load near 0 P
Place the system into test with load P
Allow all gensets except for the lead to enter into load demand stop P
Assert the system start to the DMC by failing both the Utilities P
Generators are removed from load demand stop P
System remains in test P
Gensets power the gen bus P
Load add runs to completion P
Place the system mode to off P
Gensets open their breakers P
Gensets Stop P
System in standby P

Revision: 1 Page 148 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: PLC Failure Tests
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
OT Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB and 52-TG/LB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

PLC Failure Static Field


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Remove power to both the PLCs by pulling the control fuse M:Q633 P
Verify that the horn on the DMC activates P
Verify that an alarm is present on the HMI for PLC Communication Failure P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G1A Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G2A Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P

Revision: 1 Page 149 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: PLC Failure Tests
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G3A Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G4A Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G1B Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P

Revision: 1 Page 150 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: PLC Failure Tests
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G2B Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G3B Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Manual Generator Operation of Genset from PCC with PLC failure- G4B Static Field
With the PLC power removed place the PCC for the gen into Manual P
Start the genset through the start pushbutton on the genset control panel P
Genset Starts P

Close the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker close button on the PCC P

Verify that the genset closes its respective paralleling breaker to the genbus P

Open the genset paralleling breaker using the genset breaker open button on the PCC P
Genset paralleling breaker opens P
Stop the genset through the Stop pushbutton on the PCC P
Genset Stops P
Return the genset to Auto on the PCC P

Revision: 1 Page 151 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Test
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
OT Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB and 52-TG/LB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
Ensure the PLC clock and HMI clock are setup and in sync (Setup page 3) P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P

Scheduler Test without load Static


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Go to the scheduler screen P
Set a scheduled event to run Once, on today's date, 5 minutes in the future for test
without load P
Make the test duration 3 minutes P
Enable the test P

Go to the System Control screen and change the control selection to Scheduler P
Test without load starts at the specified time P
System Mode indicates Test without load on the System control screen P
Gensets start and close their circuit breakers P
Test without load lasts the specified duration P
System Mode changes to off when duration expires P
Genset circuit breakers open and gensets stop P

Scheduler Test with load Static


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Go to the scheduler screen P
Set a scheduled event to run Once, on today's date, 5 minutes in the future for test
with load P
Make the test duration 2 minutes P
Enable the test P

Go to the System Control screen and change the control selection to Scheduler P
Test with load starts at the specified time P
System Mode indicates Test with load on the System control screen P
Gensets start and close their circuit breakers P
Load add starts and runs to completion P
Test with load lasts the specified duration P
System Mode changes to off when duration expires P

Revision: 1 Page 152 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Test
Genset circuit breakers open and gensets stop P

Scheduler Test with load, exception Static


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Go to the scheduler screen P
Set a scheduled event to run Once, on today's date, 10 minutes in the future for test
with load P
Make the test duration 10 minutes P
Enable the test P
Create an exception event on todays date, Repeat Once, 5 minutes in the future,
duration 10 minutes P
Enable the exception P

Go to the System Control screen and change the control selection to Scheduler P
When the system time matches the test with load scheduled time, test with load does
not start P
Wait the time for the exception to expire (Scheduler screen, exception should no
longer highlight as green) P
Test with load does not start even though exception does not last whole duration of
test P

Scheduler Test with load, control change to operator Static


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Go to the scheduler screen P
Set a scheduled event to run Once, on today's date, 5 minutes in the future for test
with load P
Make the test duration 5 minutes P
Enable the test P

Go to the System Control screen and change the control selection to Scheduler P
Wait for the test with load scheduled event to start P
Test with load starts P
Gensets start P
Gensets circuit breakers close P
Load add sequence starts P
Allow load add to run to completion P

Go to the System Control screen and change the control selection to operator P
Test with load is still selected under System Mode P
Place the System Mode to Off P
Place the Control Selection to Scheduler P
Confirm the System Mode stays in off P

Scheduler Test with load, control selection is not Scheduler Static


Start With OT Standby Configuration P
Go to the scheduler screen P

Revision: 1 Page 153 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Scheduler Test
Set a scheduled event to run Once, on today's date, 5 minutes in the future for test
with load P
Make the test duration 5 minutes P
Enable the test P
Go to the System Control screen and ensure the control selection is NOT set to
Scheduler (either operator or hardwired) P
Wait for the test with load scheduled event to start (indicated by green highlight on
scheduler screen) P
System does not go into test with load P
Place the Control Selection to Scheduler P

System does not go into test with load since scheduled event start was missed P

Revision: 1 Page 154 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Hot Standby Tests
OT Setup
The system will run with the setup detailed on the cover sheet unless called out within
the test forms to be different P
Hot Standby Configuration
System Start is not active P
52-UTA, 52-UTB are closed and 52-GMA, 52-GMB are open P
52-TA, 52-TB and 52-TG/LB are closed P
All genset breakers are open. P
Generator PCCs are in Auto P
Auto - Open Transition is Selected under Transition Type on the System Control
Screen P
Operator is selected under Control Selection on the System Control Screen P
System mode is Off on the System Control Screen P
Ensure the PLC clock and HMI clock are setup and in sync (Setup page 3) P
No Alarms Active, All alarms acknowledged P
Both PLCs are Running with R1A/S0 saying PRIM and R1B/S0 saying STBY P

Hot Standby PLC failure Test with load Static


Start With Hot Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and set the system mode to test with load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close their circuit breakers P
Allow load add to run to completion P

Remove power to the Primary PLC, R1A/S0 by tripping the breaker Q633 in DMCA P
Verify that the system is still in Test with load P
Verify that no loads are shed and gensets remain online (the sequence is not affected
by the PLC failure) P
HMI reports alarms for Standby card alarm P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
R1B/S0 reports PRIM P
Return power back to R1A/S0 by resetting the breaker P

When power is returned, wait, then R1A/S0 reports STBY and R1B/S0 reports PRIM P
Remove power to the Primary PLC, R1B/S0 by tripping the breaker P
Verify that the system is still in Test with load P
Verify that no loads are shed and gensets remain online (the sequence is not affected
by the PLC failure) P
HMI reports alarms for Standby card alarm P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
R1A/S0 reports PRIM P
Return power back to R1B/S0 by resetting the breaker P

When power is returned, wait, then R1B/S0 reports STBY and R1A/S0 reports PRIM P
Set the system Mode to Off P
Gensets open their circuit breakers and stop P

Revision: 1 Page 155 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Hot Standby Tests
Hot Standby NOC failure Test with load Static
Start With Hot Standby Configuration P
Go to the system control screen and set the system mode to test with load P
Gensets signaled to start P
Gensets close their circuit breakers P
Allow load add to run to completion P
Remove the NOC card in R1A/S2 P
Verify that the system is still in Test with load P
Verify that no loads are shed and gensets remain online (the sequence is not affected
by the PLC failure) P
HMI reports alarms for Standby card failure 3 P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
R1B/S0 reports PRIM P
R1A/S0 reports STBY P
Insert the NOC card back into R1A/S2 P
Wait for Fault light to clear on NOC P
Remove the NOC card in R1B/S2 P
Verify that the system is still in Test with load P
Verify that no loads are shed and gensets remain online (the sequence is not affected
by the PLC failure) P
HMI reports alarms for Standby card failure 3 P
Acknowledge and reset alarms P
R1A/S0 reports PRIM P
R1B/S0 reports STBY P
Insert the NOC card back into R1B/S2 P
Wait for Fault light to clear on NOC P
Set the system Mode to Off P
Gensets open their circuit breakers and stop P

Revision: 1 Page 156 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Reporting Test

Note: These tests verify report creation is successful. Report contents are verified as
part of the HMI gold image. These reports should auto generate during the execution
of static test. These test perform a check that the report creation is present.
Generator Report Creation Test Static
Navigate to the Generator Report screen P
Click on the search icon under the Report Groupbox P
At least one generator report exists P

Run Report Creation Test Static


Navigate to the Run Report screen P
Click on the search icon under the Report Groupbox P
At least one run report exists P

Revision: 1 Page 157 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Static Test Completion
These procedures and data should be recorded upon completion of static test
Static Test Completion Setup Static

Ensure the DMC is in auto and in a standby condition. No alarms are present on the alarm screen P
Ensure logged in as technician P

Event log Static


Navigate to the event log screen P
Open the fly out P
Press the delete button to delete the event logs from static test P
Press the confirm button P
Event logs Deleted P

Alarm history log Static


Navigate to the alarm history screen P
Open the Fly out P
Press the delete button to delete the alarm logs from static test P
Press the confirm button P
Alarm logs Deleted P

Scheduler Static
Navigate to the Scheduler Screen P

Click on each Schedule Exception and ensure the enable checkbox is unchecked for all 6 exceptions P
Click on each System Schedule and ensure the enable checkbox is unchecked for all 12 System
Schedules P
Press the confirm button P

Generator Report Static


Navigate to the Generator Report Screen P
Ensure under Report Settings, Enable is unchecked P
Delete the Report Note Text P
Press the delete button to delete the Generator Reports from static test P
Press the confirm button P
Generator Reports Deleted P

Revision: 1 Page 158 of 159


ORDER NO: 7384760 Equinix - SE-4-2
TEST FORMS: Static Test Completion
Run Report Static
Navigate to the Run Report Screen P
Ensure under Report Settings, Enable is unchecked P
Delete the Report Note Text P
Press the delete button to delete the Run Reports from static test P
Press the confirm button P
Run Reports Deleted P

System Settings Restoration Static

Restore the system settings screens for static shipment by ensuring system is in manual, zero
gensets are online P
Information Screen set to static ship values P
Setup Screens set to static ship values P
Load Demand screens set to static ship values P
Load Control screens set to static ship values P

PLC Software Recorded by software engineer

PLC Program File Name (*.sta)

PLC Program File Build #


Software Archiving Static
HMI reports matching build number under diagnostics P
Software Archived P

HMI Software Recorded by software engineer


Software Archiving Static
All HMI screens Saved as HTML P
HMI software updated if required P
Screen Captures Complete P
Software Archived P

Indusoft Project File Name (*.zip)

Protective Relay Software Recorded by software engineer


Software Archiving Static
Protective Relay Settings files archived for shipment P

PLC/HMI Power down Static


System Control Transition Type in Manual before PLC/HMI power down for shipment P

Tester/Date:
Engineer/Date:

Revision: 1 Page 159 of 159


power.cummins.com
Copyright © 2019 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved.
Cummins, the "C" logo, PowerCommand, AmpSentry, and InPower are trademarks of Cummins Inc.
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.

You might also like